Siemens MOBY I MDS 401, MDS 402, MDS 403, MDS 404, MDS 506, MDS 507, MDS 514, MDS 439 E, SLG 40, SLG 40-S, SLG 41, SLG 41-S, SLG 41C, SLG 41CC, SLG 42, SLG 43, SLG 44, ASM 400, ASM 401, ASM 410, ASM 450, ASM 452, ASM 454, ASM 424, ASM 470, SIM Manual

Table of Contents
MOBYR I
Configuration,
Installation and Service
Manual
6GT2 097-4BA00-0EA2
Published in January, 2007
General
1
Introduction to MOBY I
2
Configuration and Mounting
Guidelines
3
Mobile Data Memories
4
Read/Write Devices
5
Interfaces
6
Accessories
7
Documentation
A
Error Messages
B
ASCII Table
C
Compatibility
D
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as
well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the
manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
!
Danger
!
Warning
!
Caution
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper
precautions are not taken.
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Note
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or
to a particular part of the documentation.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual.
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified
persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits,
equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage
!
Note the following:
Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or
the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other
manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Trademarks
MOBYR, SIMATICR and SINECR are trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the
owner’s rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes.
Copyright E Siemens AG 1997 All rights reserved
Disclaimer of Liability
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including
rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model
or design, are reserved.
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement
with the hardware and software described. Since deviations
cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly
and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions.
Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Special Products, Projects Automotive Industry, Training
P.O. Box 4848, D-90327 Nuernberg
E Siemens AG 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006
Technical data subject to change.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Order No. 6GT2 097-4BA00-0EA2
Table of Contents
1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
2
Introduction to MOBY I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
3
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
Basic Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit Period of the MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication between ASM, SLG and MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication between ASM and User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-3
3-7
3-8
3-11
3-12
3.2
Field Data of MDS and SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15
3.3
MOBY I Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
3.4
Presentation of Speed to Amount of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of the Metal-Free Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effects of Metal on the Transmission Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduction of Metallic Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Side Lobes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22
3-23
3-25
3-28
3-32
3-33
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
Configuration with MDS 507 and SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Presence Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameterization of the MDS 507 in the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Configuration Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dead Battery Measurement and Changing the Battery for MDS 507 . . . .
Reducing the Sensitivity of the SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-36
3-36
3-39
3-41
3-48
3-52
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
Configuration with MDS 439 E (Heat-Proof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Dependency of the Transmission Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperatures During Cyclic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life Span of the Mobile Data Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-56
3-56
3-58
3-61
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
3.8.6
3.8.7
3.8.8
3.8.9
EMC Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spreading of Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoiding Interference Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipotential Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shielding the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Rules on EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-62
3-62
3-63
3-64
3-67
3-70
3-71
3-72
3-74
3-76
3.9
Concept of MOBY Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-78
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
i
Table of Contents
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.10.4
4
5
6
ii
Cable and Plug Connector Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug Connector Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-80
3-80
3-82
3-84
3-87
Mobile Data Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4.2
MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
4.3
MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
4.4
MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
4.5
MDS 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
4.6
MDS 506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
4.7
MDS 507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
4.8
MDS 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24
4.9
MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
Read/Write Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
5.2
SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
5.3
SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
5.4
SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
5.5
SLG 41C/SLG 41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15
5.6
SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21
5.7
SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25
5.8
SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-29
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMATIC S5 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
6-4
6-10
6-14
6.3
ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
6.4
ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
6.5
ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-38
6.6
ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-45
6.7
ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
6.8
SIM Serial Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-63
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table of Contents
7
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7.1
MOBY Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7.2
MOBY Wide-Range Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
7.3
MOBY STG I Hand-Held Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
7.4
Acquisition Station ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14
A
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
B
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
B.1
General Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
B.2
B.2.1
B.2.2
B.2.3
B.2.4
ASM-Related Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASM 400 with FB 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASM 450 with FB 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Indication with FC 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-7
B-7
B-9
B-11
B-13
B.3
Filehandler Error Messages for ASM 401/452/473/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-16
C
ASCII Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
D
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
iii
Table of Contents
Figures
2-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-37
3-38
3-39
3-40
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-48
3-49
iv
Overview of MOBY I components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working in static operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working in dynamic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical direction of movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal direction of movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tolerances of the height allowance of the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialog setup for MOBY I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission window during dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLG 41 (vertical operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLG 42 (vertical operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLG 43 (vertical operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLG 44 (data quantity at low speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLG 44 (enlarged section of figure 3-13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation on metal carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flush installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the SLG on metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the MDS on metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interfering metal carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flush installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly line with MDS 403 reclining or standing (top) and
MDS 404 (bottom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample configuration of tABTAST: Train with several cars . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of the configuration (drawn to scale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coding for tABTAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real transmission window between the MDS 507 and the SLG 44 . . . . .
Main lobe with different operating distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main and side lobes with different operating distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch-on window for various receiving capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch-on window with various angle deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission window of the MDS 507 with dead battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dead battery measurement with the STG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dead battery message with SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduction of the receiving capacity of the SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the cover of the SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soldered jumpers and antenna measuring points on the SLG 44 . . . . . . .
Label for identification of the hardware status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offset factor C in relation to the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduction of field length and limit distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram of the temperature progression from table 3-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Complete temperature progression during simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spreading of interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The four kinds of interference coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shielding via housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoidance of interference via optimal layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering the supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suppression of inductive interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipotential bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit diagram of the principle of grounding fault monitoring . . . . . . . . . .
SIMATIC PLC 100U with ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-12
3-13
3-17
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-21
3-21
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-28
3-29
3-32
3-37
3-38
3-39
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-47
3-48
3-48
3-52
3-54
3-54
3-55
3-57
3-57
3-59
3-60
3-64
3-66
3-67
3-68
3-69
3-70
3-71
3-72
3-73
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table of Contents
3-50
3-51
3-52
3-53
3-54
3-55
3-56
3-57
3-58
3-59
3-60
3-61
3-62
3-63
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-24
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
Serial interface SIM with TTY interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shielding of the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of the shield rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interruption of shielded cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simple layout with ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layout of the ASM 470/475 with shield connecting element . . . . . . . . . . .
SLG with supplementary power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOBY wide-range power pack on the ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing of mounting the SLG plug connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection cable: ASM 400/401/424/454, ES 030 ↔ SLG . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection cable: ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection cable: ASM 410 ↔ SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection cable: ASM 470/475 ↔ SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection cable RS 232 PC ↔ ASM 424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions of MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ways to mount the MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field midpoints of MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions of MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field midpoints of MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions of MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission window of the MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission window of the MDS 403 with auxiliary lobes . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDS 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions of MDS 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDS 506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions of MDS 506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDS 507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions of MDS 507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDS 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions of MDS 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensional drawing of MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder of the MDS 439 E data memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly of MDS 439 E with holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metal-free space for MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read/write device SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View of the antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metal-free space for SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting diagram and dimensions of SLG 40 with mounting clamp . . . .
Distance D for SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensional diagram of SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read/write device SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View of the antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metal-free space for SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distance D for SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensional diagram of SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission window of SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metal-free space for SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distance D for SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-73
3-74
3-75
3-75
3-78
3-79
3-81
3-81
3-83
3-84
3-84
3-85
3-85
3-86
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-29
5-3
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-13
5-13
5-13
v
Table of Contents
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-37
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-30
vi
Dimensional diagram of SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read head changes of SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLG 41C/41CC read/write device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission window of SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metal-free area of SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distance D: SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions of SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLG 42 read/write device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission window of SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metal-free space for SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distance D: SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensional diagram of SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read/write device SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission window of SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metal-free space for SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distance D: SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensional diagram of SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read/write device SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission window of SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metal-free space of SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distance D: SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensional diagram of SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurator of ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug connectors and their assignment for ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switches and plug-in jumpers for ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings on the channel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CR 700-0LA module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CR 700-0LB module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CR 700-1 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CR 700-2 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CR 700-3 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ER 701-3 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S5-135U/155U central controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S5-155U/155H central controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S5-183U expansion device for S5-135U/155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S5-184U expansion device for S5-135U/155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S5-185U expansion device for S5-135U/155U/155H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S5-187U expansion device for S5-135U/155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurator for the ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASM 450/452 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurator of ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection plug, ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00) . . . . . . .
Connection cable, ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG (6GT2 091-1CH20) . . . . . .
PROFIBUS cable with 24 V power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensional drawing of the ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin allocation and LEDs of ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the
terminating resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
5-14
5-15
5-18
5-19
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-23
5-23
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-27
5-27
5-28
5-28
5-29
5-31
5-32
5-32
5-33
6-5
6-10
6-11
6-13
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-16
6-16
6-17
6-17
6-17
6-18
6-21
6-22
6-25
6-26
6-31
6-32
6-32
6-33
6-34
6-34
6-35
6-36
6-37
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table of Contents
6-31
6-32
6-33
6-34
6-35
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-39
6-40
6-41
6-42
6-43
6-44
6-45
6-46
6-47
6-48
6-49
6-50
6-51
6-52
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
ASM 454/424 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurator for ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensional drawing of ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting diagram for the adapter floor plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASM 470/475 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurator for ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring of ASM 470/475 to SLG (6GT2 091-0E...) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Baring of the cable shield when customer makes own cable . . . . . . . . . . .
ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASM 473 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurator for an ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum configuration of ASM 473 on an ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin asssignment and LEDs of ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules. . . . . . .
Configurator for SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIM serial interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flush installation of SIM in metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission window of SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions of SIM serial interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection assignment of 24 V output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions of MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOBY STG I hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware of the MOBY STG I hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurator of ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample configuration of ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-38
6-41
6-42
6-42
6-44
6-44
6-45
6-46
6-50
6-52
6-52
6-53
6-55
6-58
6-60
6-61
6-62
6-63
6-64
6-66
6-67
6-67
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-10
7-15
7-19
vii
Table of Contents
Tables
2-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-21
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-28
viii
Technical data of MOBY I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time constants K and tbyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Times for directory operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of all MDS and SLG components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG in mm (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data during dialog operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions for flush installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduction of the field data due to metal. Specifications in % as
related to non-metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chemical resistance of data memories made of polyamide 12 . . . . . . . . .
Chemical resistance of the MDS 439 E made of polyphenylene sulfide .
Actual processing time of an MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limit distance Sg for reduced sending field strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limit cycles of the temperature for MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical temperature profile of an application in a paint shop . . . . . . . . . . .
Interference sources: Origin and effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Causes of coupling paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug connector assignment of the SLG plug connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D plug connector .
Ordering data for the SLG plug connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for MOBY cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview table of MDS (replacement parts not included in the table) . . .
Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decrease in field data with mounting of the MDS 401 on or in metal . . . .
Ordering data for MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for MDS 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of MDS 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of MDS 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for MDS 506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of MDS 506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of MDS 506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for MDS 507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of MDS 507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of MDS 507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for MDS 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of MDS 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of MDS 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limit cycles of MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
3-9
3-10
3-15
3-16
3-18
3-19
3-24
3-27
3-33
3-35
3-39
3-55
3-58
3-59
3-65
3-66
3-80
3-82
3-82
3-83
3-87
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-11
4-11
4-12
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-18
4-19
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-24
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-26
4-27
4-30
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table of Contents
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-26
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
Overview table of the SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data of SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage capacity of the mobile data memories when the filehandler
is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of page frame addressing for FB 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status and error LEDs of ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating modes for ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED indication for PROFIBUS diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function of the LEDs on ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional LEDs on the ASM 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data of ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites for use of ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of SIM serial interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field data of SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of plug connector assignment for SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for MOBY software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data of the MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data of the STG I hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-11
5-11
5-12
5-15
5-15
5-17
5-21
5-21
5-22
5-25
5-25
5-26
5-29
5-30
5-31
6-3
6-6
6-7
6-9
6-11
6-12
6-19
6-19
6-23
6-24
6-28
6-29
6-36
6-39
6-40
6-47
6-48
6-50
6-51
6-56
6-56
6-59
6-64
6-65
6-66
6-68
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-11
ix
Table of Contents
7-5
7-6
7-7
B-1
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
B-6
B-7
D-1
x
Technical data of the STG I hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering data for ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error messags of FB 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error messages of FB 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error variable error_FC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error variable error_Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filehandler error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatibility of MDS and SLG types (status: September 2004) . . . . . . . .
7-11
7-16
7-17
B-3
B-7
B-9
B-11
B-13
B-14
B-16
D-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
1
General
This configuration, installation and service manual will help you to plan and
configure your MOBY I system. It covers the guidelines on configuration
and installation and provides complete technical data on the individual components.
Technical support
The specialists of Technical Support are ready to advise and support you
when you have questions on the functions and handling of our MOBY products.
You can reach us around the clock anywhere in the world.
Telephone:
Fax:
E-mail:
Internet
+49 (0) 180 5050-222
+49 (0) 180 5050-223
[email protected]
General news on MOBY I or an overview of our other identification systems
are available on the Internet under the following address.
http://www.siemens.de/moby
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
1-1
General
1-2
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
2
Introduction to MOBY I
MOBY I is an RF identification system for optimization of material flow and
production processes in the upper performance sector. This high-performance, high-capacity, long-distance system permits high data transmission
speeds between data memories (MDS) and read/write devices (SLG).
Principal application areas
MOBY I is primarily used when object identification must be inductive (i.e.,
without contact), reliable and fast and production and manufacturing parameters must be carried on the object.
S Processing manufacturing
(e.g., data memory affixed to the product carrier)
S Assembly
(e.g., data memory affixed to the work piece carrier)
S Conveyors
(e.g., data memory on suspended rails)
S Transportation
Technical data of
MOBY I
Overview of
MOBY I
components
Table 2-1
Technical data of MOBY I
Storage capacity
8 kbytes to 32 kbytes
Memory type
RAM, EEPROM and FRAM
Data organization
File or address-oriented
Protection rating
IP65 to IP68
Operating temperature
–25 to +70/85° C, 200° C (cyclic)
Data transmission speed (SLG - MDS)
w 0.8 msec/byte
Read/write distance
0 to 1000 mm
Can be connected to
SIMATIC S5/7, PCs, computers, PLCs of
other manufacturers, and PROFIBUS
S MDS (mobile data memory)
S SLG (read/write device)
S ASM (interface module)
S STG (service and test device)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
2-1
Introduction to MOBY I
PC/Controller
of other
manufacturer
SIMs operated
directly on the
serial inteface
RS 232 / RS 422 / TTY
ASM 400/401
For SIMATIC
S 115U
S 135U
S 155U/H
S FB 250/230
ASM 410
ASM 424
ASM 450/452
For SIMATIC For connection to: For
S 90U
S PC
S PROFIBUS DP
S 95U
S Controller
S FB 240/FC 44/
S 100U/H
of other
FC 46/FC 56 for
S ET 100/200 manufacturer
SIMATIC S5/S7
S FB 41
S Computer
SINUMERIK via
serial interface
ASM = Interface module
ASM 456
ASM 470/475
For
For SIMATIC
S PROFIBUS DP/ S S7-300 with
DPV1
FC 47/FC 45/
S FC 45
FC 56
S ET 200M with
FB 47/FC 47/
FC 45/FC 56
ASM 454
For
S PROFIBUS DPV1
connection with
FC 45 for
SIMATIC S7
ASM 473
Fits ET 200X;
Control via
PROFIBUS
DPV1 with
FC 45/FC 56
RF170C
For
S PROFIBUS DP/
DPV1
S PROFIBUS IO
S FC 45/FC 55/
FC 56
X1
X2
Internal system interface/max. cable length of 1000 m
SLG = Read/
write device
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
SLG 41
SLG 41-S
SLG 41C
SLG 41CC
SLG 42
SLG 43
SLG 44
SIM 41
SIM 42
SIM 43
MDS 439 E
8-Kbyte EEPROM
200 °C cyclically
MDS 507
32-Kbyte RAM/
Range of 1 m
Inductive power/data transmission (1.81 MHz/134 kHz)
MDS 401
8-Kbyte FRAM
MDS 402
8-Kbyte FRAM
MDS 403
8-Kbyte FRAM
MDS 514
32-Kbyte RAM/FRAM
MDS 404
8-Kbyte FRAM
MDS 506
32-Kbyte RAM/FRAM
MDS = Mobile data memory
Figure 2-1
2-2
Overview of MOBY I components
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3
3-1
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.1
Basic Requirements
!
FCC Compliance
Statement
Warning
Do not make changes to the devices.
Violation will invalidate interference emission certification (BZT, FCC), CE
and the manufacturer’s warranty.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note
Any unauthorized changes and modifications to this device could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
To choose the correct MOBY I components, apply the following criteria to
your particular application.
S Transmission distance (i.e., read/write distance)
S The amount of data to be transferred
S Metal-free spaces for MDS and SLG
S Static or dynamic transmission of the data
S Speed for dynamic transmission
S Tolerances of the tracking
S Environmental conditions (e.g., moisture, temperature, chemical influences and so on)
3-2
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.1.1
Transmission Window
The read/write device (i.e., SLG) generates an inductive alternating field.
The field is strongest in the vicinity of the SLG and decreases in strength the
greater the distance from the SLG. Distribution of the field depends on the
layout and geometry of the antennas on the SLG and the MDS.
MDS functionality requires a minimum field strength on the MDS achieved
at a distance of Sg from the SLG. The figure below shows the transmission
window between the MDS and the SLG.
2L
ÜL
L
M
M
Sa
Sg
MDS
SLG
View of the side
2L
L
M
M
L
View of the top
Max. transmission window at approx. 1/2 Sa
SLG
Transmission window at Sa
(The somewhat shorter field length for Sa has
already been included in the calculation formula
in chap. 3.1.2)
M: Midpoint of the transmission window
Sa: Operating distance
Sg: Limit distance (The limit distance is the maximum clearance between the top of the
SLG and the top of the MDS at which the transmission will still function under normal conditions.)
L: Length of a transmission window for vertical direction of movement of the MDS
2L: Length of a transmission window for horizontal direction of movement of the MDS
Remember that a transmission hole (ÜL) exists in the middle of the window. When
an MDS stops there, it cannot be processed.
ÜL: The transmission gap is located between the two transmission windows. Processing with the MDS in this area is not possible. The transmission gap is several
millimeters in length. ÜL will be disregarded in the rest of this chapter
(i.e., ÜL = 0 mm).
Figure 3-1
Transmission window
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-3
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
The shape of the active field corresponds to two symmetrically positioned
circles (cf. view of top). The strength of the field drops (i.e., transmission
gap) in the area of the symmetry axis of the SLG. The direction of movement
and rotation of the MDS can be disregarded
(exception: MDS 402, 403 and 507).
The above figure also shows that operation in the area between Sa and Sg is
possible. The greater the distance, the smaller the active working area becomes until it is reduced to one point at distance Sg. For this reason, only
static operation should be used in the area between Sa and Sg.
Moving the MDS over both transmission windows produces an active length
of 2L. 2L can be substituted for L in the formula for the transmit period (see
chap. 3.1.2). In actual practice, a precisely doubled transmit period does not
occur (see chap. 3.2). The following points must be considered when configuring the system.
Note
Data transmission can be briefly interrupted in the area of the symmetry axis
of the SLG. This interruption is transparent for the user. Execution of the
interrupted command is automatically continued as soon as the MDS arrives
in the second active area. The duration of the interruption can be any length
of time. This is the case when the MDS stops prcisely on the symmetry axis.
The user can determine this with the presence signal (i.e., ANW) which can
disappear in the transmission gap. The presence signal can be scanned by the
user. This signal shows whether an MDS is currently located in one of the
two transmission windows.
Working in static
operation
The greatest operating distance (Sg) is achieved vertically over the midpoint
(M) of the transmission window. Figure 3-2 illustrates this distance at which
transmission is still possible.
MDS
Transmission
window
M
Sg
SLG
1/2 L
Figure 3-2
Working in static operation
The optimum distance between the two symmetry axes is 1/2L. The “transmission gap” in the middle of the SLG can be disregarded.
3-4
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Working in dynamic operation
Transmission window
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
SLG
M
MDS
Horizontal
M
MDS
Vertical
Figure 3-3
Width of the transmission window
Working in dynamic operation
The following approximation formula applies to practical applications.
B + 0.4 @ L
B:
Width of the transmission window
L:
Length of the transmission window
The width of the transmission window (B) is particularly important for the
tolerance of mechanical tracking. When B is maintained, the formula can be
used without restriction for the transmit period. The active area can be represented as shown below.
Vertical direction
of movement
Direction of movement of the MDS
L
M
B
Figure 3-4
Vertical direction of movement
This direction of movement does not produce a “gap” in data transmission.
The presence signal (i.e., ANW) precisely indicates the presence of an MDS.
This direction of movement is always recommended when the configuration
permits.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-5
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Horizontal direction of movement
B
M
M
Direction of movement of the MDS
2L
Figure 3-5
Horizontal direction of movement
This direction of movement should only be used when the simple field length
(L) is not sufficient for transmission during dynamic operation. The use of
the presence check or the evaluation of this signal for control purposes is not
recommended in this operation mode. When located in the data transmission
“gap” at the symmetry axis, the presence signal could cause control errors in
the user program.
Transmission
window of the
MDS 403
The transmission window of the MDS 403 is described in chap. 4.4.
Transmission
window of the
MDS 507
The transmission window of the MDS 507 is described in chap. 3.6.
3-6
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.1.2
Transmit Period of the MDS
The transmit period is the time during which the MDS is located in the transmission window of an SLG. During this time, the SLG can exchange data
with the MDS.
The formula used to calculate the transmit period is shown below.
tV +
L @ 0.8Ă[m]
VMDSĂƪ mńs ƫ
tV:
Transmit period of the MDS
L:
Length of the transmission window (cf. table 3-3)
VMDS:
Speed of the data memory in dynamic operation
0.8:
Constant factor. Compensates for temperature influences and production tolerances.
During static operation, the transmit period can be any length of time. The
transmit period must last at least as long as necessary to conclude communication with the MDS.
During dynamic operation, the transmit period is determined by the system
environment. The amount of data to be transferred must be adjusted to the
transmit period or vice versa.
General formula:
t V w tK
tV :
Transmit period of the data memory in the field of the SLG
tK:
Communication time between MDS and ASM
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-7
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.1.3
Communication between ASM, SLG and MDS
Communication between ASM, SLG and MDS is asynchronous with a transmission speed of 19200 baud.
General formula:
t K + K)t Byte @ n
1
Calculation of the maximum amount of user data:
n max +
3-8
t V-K
t Byte
tK:
Communication time between ASM, SLG and MDS
tV:
Transmit period
n:
Amount of user data in bytes
nmax:
Maximum amount of user data in bytes during dynamic operation
tbyte:
Transmission time for 1 byte (cf. table 3-1)
K:
Constant. The constant represents an internal system time. It contains the time required for power buildup on the MDS and the time
required for command transmission (cf. table 3-1).
1
The tK calculation applies to interference-free transmission. When
transmission is briefly interrupted due to external interference, the
ASM continues the command automatically.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Table 3-1
Time constants K and tbyte
Constant K [msec]
tByte
y
[[msec]]
Data Memory
MDS 507
All Other
MDSs
66
16
0.8
RAM/FRAM
All
R/W
66
16
0.8
EEPROM
8 Kbytes
R
66
16
3.8
EEPROM
8 Kbytes
W
883
383
1.4
RAM/FRAM
All
R
883
383
1.4
EEPROM
8 Kbytes
R
1073
573
1.4
RAM/FRAM
All
W
1903
1403
4.4
EEPROM
8 Kbytes
W
110
60
1
RAM/FRAM
All
R/W
190
140
1.4
EEPROM
8 Kbytes
R
190
140
3.8
EEPROM
8 Kbytes
W
190
140
2.6
RAM/FRAM
All
R
190
140
3.0
RAM/FRAM
All
W
270
220
3.5
EEPROM
8 Kbytes
R
330
280
8.6
EEPROM
8 Kbytes
W
2
3
4
Memory
Type
Memory
Size
Operation2
Operating
M d
Mode
Normal
operation
ECCoperation4
Filehandler
Filehandler
with ECC4
Operation: R = Read, W = Write
Worst-case values. Usually not reached.
ECC operation: The above table does not contain the ASM computing times for error
correction of data when MDS is defective. Net capacity of the MDS is reduced.
This table applies to all commands. When a user command consists of several subcommands, the formula for tK must be applied to each subcommand.
Special features
of the MDS 507
When the MDS 507 is used, an additional 50 msec is added to K. This time
is required to activate the switch-on logic of the MDS 507.
The MDS 507 automatically switches off immediately after each command.
tAUS is the time between the last communication with the MDS and its
switch-off.
t AUS [ 6Ămsec
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-9
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
If the MDS is processed with an additional command after switch-off, it requires another switch-on time of K = 50 msec until the command can be executed. MDS switch-off can be avoided by using the permanent presence
check (tABTAST = 0). Remember, however, that continuous use of the presence check puts a heavy strain on the dialog battery of the MDS 507.
Caution
!
If an MDS 507 is subject to strong interference during and after processing,
the MDS may not switch off since the dialog battery may have gone dead.
Such fields of interference can be caused by incorrectly wired frequency
converters or defective motor controllers, for example.
Brief interference pulses at intervals of t > 20 msec will not cause the MDS
to malfunction.
Remarks on the
operation mode
with filehandler
S The time constant K already contains a read and write operation which
the filehandler automatically executes when a new MDS arrives.
S Read and write operations of the directory and the file allocation table
(i.e., FAT) are not included in the above table. These operations are required when something has been changed in the directory area.
Examples:
– MDS with altered data structure enters the field.
– Files are written with data for the first time.
– New files are created with “create.”
S The following times (in msec) apply to directory operations.
Table 3-2
Times for directory operations
8-Kbyte
EEPROM
Without ECC
With
ECC
32-Kbyte
RAM/FRAM
Without ECC
With
ECC
8-Kbyte
RAM/FRAM
With-out
ECC
With
ECC
Read directory + FAT
580
950
940
1600
580
950
Write directory entry 1
300
310
330
400
220
270
Write directory entry + FAT 1
1190
1260
540
750
410
600
1
These time include the calculation of the checksum of DIR + FAT.
Times:
8 KB = 160 msec
32 KB = 270 msec
3-10
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.1.4
Communication between ASM and User Program
The time required for communication between ASM and user depends on the
following factors.
S Cycle time and type of programmable controller
S Software used
– Normal mode:
FB 41, FB 250, FC 47, FB 47, FB 240,
FC 44, FC 45
– Filehandler:
FB 230, FC 46, FB 246, FC 56
Communication between the ASM 400 and the user can be divided into three
steps.
a) The user issues a command and starts it. When the FB is called the next
time, the command is transferred to the ASM and is acknowledged by the
ASM.
b) The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user or the FBs are
in wait status. Data communication with the MDS starts as soon as an
MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG. The MDS data are
stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness.
c) Communication of the ASM with the MDS has been concluded. When
the FB is called the next time, the read data or the results of a write
command are transferred from the ASM to the user. The user receives
a finished message.
See applicable documentation for the exact communication times
between ASM and user.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-11
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.1.5
Sample Calculation
The customer
application
A conveyor system moves the pallets with the MDS at a maximum speed of
VMDS = 2 m/sec. The direction of movement is vertical. The following
MOBY I components were selected.
S ASM 400 (with FB 250)
S SLG 42
S MDS 514
Task:
a) Physical specifications are to be provided to the constructor of the plant.
b) The maximum number of bytes in dynamic operation is to be provided to
the programmer.
For technical data of the components, see the tables in chapter 3.2 (“field
data of MDS and SLG”).
Tolerance of the
height allowance
of the pallet
Direction of movement
MDS
H
0 < H < Sa
0 < H < 30 mm
SLG
(View of the side)
Figure 3-6
3-12
Tolerances of the height allowance of the pallet
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Tolerances of the
side allowance of
the pallet
Direction of movement of the MDS
Middle line of the MDS allowance
Tolerance range of the side allowance
SLG
X1
Symmetry axis
of the SLG
X2
B
Figure 3-7
Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet
L:
Length of the transmission window
B:
Width of the transmission window
[X1, X2]:Distance of the symmetry axes between MDS and SLG including
tolerance range
x 1 + 1 L * 1 B + 45Ămm * 18Ămmąx1 + 27Ămm
2
2
x 2 + 1 L ) 1 B + 45Ămm ) 18Ămmąx2 + 63Ămm
2
2
Minimum distance
between SLG and
SLG
See table 3-4 for this value.
Minimum distance
between MDS and
MDS
See table 3-3 for this value.
D u 800Ămm
D u 250Ămm
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-13
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Maximum number
of bytes
t V + L @ 0.8 + 0.09Ăm @ 0.8 + 0.036Ăs + 36Ămsec
VMDS
2Ămsec
For normal operating mode, see table in chap. 3.1.3 for the values of K and
tbyte.
K = 16 msec ; tbyte = 0.8 msec
Calculation of nmax
n max +
tV * K
+ 36Ămsec * 16Ămsec + 25ąn max + 25Ăbytes
t byte
0.8Ămsec
Up to 25 bytes can be read while the MDS is passing by in vertical operation.
3-14
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.2
Field Data of MDS and SLG
The table below shows the field data of all MOBY I MDS and SLG components. This makes selecting an MDS and an SLG particularly easy.
The technical data represent average data and are valid for an ambient temperature of 0 to 50 C, a supply voltage of 22 V to 27 V DC, and metal-free
surroundings. Tolerances of " 20% are permitted for production conditions
and temperature fluctuations.
Additional tolerances apply to the field data when the total voltage range
from 20 V to 30 V DC is utilized for the SLG, and/or the entire temperature
range is utilized for MDS and SLG.
Table 3-3
MDS
SLG
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
SLG 413
SLG 41C
SLG 42
SLG 43
SLG 44
SIM 4x
1
2
3
Field data of all MDS and SLG components
MDS 514
MDS 404
L
–
–
36
30
90
140
–
60
2L
–
–
72
60
180
260
–
80
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
SLG 413
SLG 41C
SLG 42
SLG 43
SLG 44
SIM 4x
–
–
15
12
36
60
–
20
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
SLG 413
SLG 41C
SLG 42
SLG 43
SLG 44
SIM 4x
–
–
0 to 12
0 to 12
0 to 30
0 to 50
–
0 to 20
MDS 506
MDS 439 E
MDS 401
MDS 402
Length of the Transmission Window in mm (L)
L
2L
L
2L
L
2L
–
–
–
–
Ld = 182
–
–
–
–
Ld = 92
–
–
–
–
30
50
–
–
–
–
20
40
120
190
120
210
–
–
220
400
190
330
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
85
100
75
100
–
–
Width of the Transmission Window in mm (B)
–
–
Ld = 182
–
–
Ld = 92
–
–
12
–
–
8
48
48
–
88
76
–
–
–
–
30
30
–
Operating Distance in mm (Sa)
–
–
2 to 8
–
–
2 to 6
–
–
0 to 6
–
–
0 to 6
10 to 35
10 to 55
–
20 to 100
20 to 80
–
–
–
–
0 to 25
0 to 25
–
MDS 403
MDS 507
L1
–
–
65
65
110
–
–
80
L1
–
–
–
–
–
–
1200
–
–
–
25
25
50
–
–
45
–
–
–
–
–
–
300
–
–
–
4 to 15
4 to 15
10 to 30
–
–
0 to 25
–
–
–
–
–
–
100 to 800
–
Caution: The MDS 507 and MDS 403 must be positioned based on the direction. The geometry of the transmission
window differs from the other MDSs. Cf. chap. 3.6 or 4.4.
Ld: Due to the special characteristics of the antenna of the MDS 402/401, a round transmission window is produced
when used with the SLG 40. In static operation, a maximum median deviation Lm of " 9 mm is permitted.
Also applies to the SLG 41-S
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-15
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Table 3-3
MDS
SLG
3
Field data of all MDS and SLG components
MDS 514
MDS 404
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
SLG 413
SLG 41C
SLG 42
SLG 43
SLG 44
SIM 4x
25
25
60
90
33
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
SLG 413
SLG 41C
SLG 42
SLG 43
SLG 44
SIM 4x
> 90
> 90
> 250
> 500
> 200
MDS 506
MDS 439 E
MDS 401
MDS 402
Limit distance in mm (Sg)
10
8
10
10
70
70
150
125
40
33
Distance from MDS to MDS in mm (D1)
> 50
> 50
> 80
> 80
> 300
> 500
> 600
> 600
> 300
> 300
-
MDS 403
MDS 507
30
30
80
40
1000
-
> 120
> 120
> 200
> 200
> 4000
-
Also applies to the SLG 41-S
Table 3-4
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG in mm (D)
SLG
SLG
SLG 40/40-S
SLG 41/41-S/41C
SLG 42
SLG 43
SLG 44
SIM 4x
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
> 50/80
-
SLG 41
SLG 41-S
SLG 41C
> 200
> 800
> 2000
> 6000
> 700
SLG 42
SLG 43
SLG 44
SIM 4x
> 800
> 800
> 2000
> 6000
> 800
> 2000
> 2000
> 2000
> 6000
> 2000
> 6000
> 6000
> 6000
> 6000
> 6000
> 700
> 800
> 2000
> 6000
> 700
Note
Adherence to the values specified in table 3-4 is essential. There is a danger
of affecting inductive fields if the values are underranged. This would increase the time for data transmission incalculably or a command would be
terminated with errors.
3-16
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.3
MOBY I Dialog
How it works
During the MOBY I dialog, one ASM exchanges data with another ASM
while both SLGs are in the transmission window. When parameterizing the
two ASMs, always make sure that one ASM uses normal mode (station_N)
and the other uses dialog mode (station_D).
As soon as the ASM for dialog mode is parameterized as such, a memory
area is created there called VMDS (see figure 3-8). The VMDS is then used
for communication memory. Its setup is like a dual port RAM. Station_N and
station_D can be read and write accessed in the same way on the VMDS.
Station_D supplies data to the VMDS (write access). These data are read by
station_N as soon as both SLGs meet.
Dialog setup
Figure 3-8 shows the setup of dialog communication with MOBY I.
Station_D
Station_N
MOBY I interface in
normal operation
(e.g., ASM 400 in
SIMATIC S5)
MOBY I interface in dialog
operation
(e.g., ASM 470 in SIMATIC S7)
ÒÒÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÒÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÒÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
VMDS
Read or write
the VMDS with
FB 250
SLG_N
Read/write/
initialize the
VMDS with
FC 47
SLG_D
Station_N reads/writes the
VMDS via clearance in air
Figure 3-8
Dialog setup for MOBY I
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-17
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Table 3-5
Designation
Communication
time during dialog
Definition of terms
Explanation
Station_N
Normal ASM of MOBY I (all MOBY ASMs as per chap. 6)
Station_N is used by the user in the normal manner (i.e., as if the user
wanted to exchange data with an MDS).
SLG_N
An SLG (SLG 41, SLG 42, SLG 43 and SLG 44) which is connected
to station_N
Station_D
Dialog ASM of MOBY I (ASM 400, ASM 410 and ASM 470)
When switched on by a user command, station_D is parameterized as
the dialog ASM. During parameterization, a 16-Kbyte memory area is
defined on station_D. This memory is called the VMDS (i.e., virtual
MDS). It is used for communication storage. Processing of station_D
by the user is identical to the program in station_N. Station_D uses
the same tools as station_N (e.g., FC 47).
SLG_D
An SLG (SLG 41, SLG 42, SLG 43 and SLG 44) which is connected
to station_D
VMDS
Virtual mobile data memory = VMDS. The VMDS is a 16-Kbyte
memory area (ASM 452 = 1280 bytes) on station_D. When station_D
is turned on and parameterized, the VMDS is defined and cleared.
When configuring the communication time, the same times apply as described in chap. 3.1.3.
t k + 16Ămsec)0.8Ămsec @ n byte
3-18
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Transmission window during dialog
The transmission window from SLG_D to SLG_N has a polarization direction (i.e., SLG_D and SLG_N must be directed towards each other at certain
angles). Figure 3-9 shows the transmission window during dialog.
SLG_D
Sg
Sa
Direction of movement of SLG_D to
SLG_N
SLG_N
L
View of the side
View of the top
B
Enlargement of the transmission window
Positioning of SLG_D
when SLG_D and SLG_N are working
(tolerance)
at a minimum operating distance
Transmission window
sa = Operating distance
sg = Limit distance
L = Length of the transmission window
B = Width of the transmission window
Figure 3-9
Field data during
dialog operation
Transmission window during dialog
Table 3-6 shows the field data during dialog operation. Dimensions are given
in millimeters.
Table 3-6
Field data during dialog operation
All dimensions in mm
SLG 41SLG 41
SLG 42SLG 42
SLG 43SLG 43
SLG 44SLG 44
Length of the transmission window (L)
60
230
600
3000
Width of the transmission window (B)
30
80
280
1300
0 to 15
0 to 70
20 to 250
200 to 1000
30
130
450
2500
> 200
> 800
> 2000
> 10000
Operating distance (sa)
Limit distance (sg)
Distance from SLG to SLG (D)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-19
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.4
Presentation of Speed to Amount of Data
The curves shown here will simplify selection of MOBY I MDS and SLG
components for dynamic operation. Information from the table in chapter
3.1.3 was used to calculate the curves. The curves apply to vertical operation
with a single length of the transmission window (L).
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
MDS 514 / MDS 404 (Read/Write)
1,66 100
1,33
80
1
60
0,66
40
0,33
20
MDS 403 (Read/Write)
0
0
0
Figure 3-10
10
20
30
4
3,5
60
70
80
90
Number of bytes (n)
MDS 514 / MDS 404 (Read/Write)
(m/min)
240
210
3
180
2,5
150
2
120
1,5
90
1
60
0,5
30
0
MDS 403 (Read/Write)
MDS 506 (Read/Write)
0
0
Figure 3-11
3-20
50
SLG 41 (vertical operation)
V MDS
(m/s)
40
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Number of bytes (n)
SLG 42 (vertical operation)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
4
240
3.5
210
3
180
2.5
150
2
120
1.5
90
1
60
0.5
30
0
MDS 514/MDS 404 (Read/Write)
MDS 506 (Read/Write)
0
0
Figure 3-12
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
Number of
bytes (n)
270
SLG 43 (vertical operation)
V MDS
(km/h) (m/s)
57.6
16
50.4
14
43.2
12
36
10
28.8
8
21.6
6
14.4
4
7.2
2
0
0
MDS 507 (Read/Write)
0
Figure 3-13
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Number of
bytes (n)
SLG 44 (data quantity at low speed)
V MDS
(km/h) (m/s)
57.6
16
50.4
14
43.2
12
36
10
28.8
8
21.6
6
14.4
4
7,2
2
0
0
MDS 507 (Read/Write)
0
Figure 3-14
10
20
30
40
50
Number of bytes (n)
SLG 44 (enlarged section of figure 3-13)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-21
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.5
Installation Guidelines
The MDS and SLG are devices which work with induction. Every type of
metal, particularly iron and ferromagnetic materials, in the vicinity of these
devices influences their field geometry. To ensure that the field data described in chapter 3.2 retain their validity, several points must be adhered to
when configuring and installing the devices.
S Minimum distance between two read/write devices. See data sheets of
the SLG.
S Minimum distance between two adjacent data memories. See data sheets
of the MDS.
S Metal-free area with flush installation of SLG and MDS in metal
S Installation of several SLGs in metal frames or carriers
The next few chapters describe how installation in metallic surroundings affects the identification system.
3-22
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.5.1
Definition of the Metal-Free Area
Installation on
metal carriers
When an MDS or SLG is mounted directly on metal, no attention must
usually be paid to additional metal-free areas. The physical height of the
MDS/SLG housing ensures a sufficient distance between the antenna and the
metal.
However, the technical characteristics Sg, Sa and L can be reduced by up to
50% when the MDS is mounted on metal objects whose dimensions are
greater than those of the MDS.
Although the formula for the transmit period (see chapter 3.1.2) includes a
constant factor for such effects, you should counteract a reduction of the
transmission window when critical applications are involved.
The following solutions are open to you.
S Installation on plastic holder (see figure 3-15)
S Installation of MDS at a 8 to 20-mm distance from the metal (e.g., plastic
washer)
S Keep the metal plate for the holder as small as possible
Metal
Non-metal
Figure 3-15
Installation on metal carrier
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-23
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Flush installation
Flush installation of MDS and SLG in metal is also permitted. However,
minimum distances between the edge of the housing and the metal must be
maintained.
b
b
a
h
a
a, b: Metal-free distances
Metal
h: Physical height of MDS
or SLG = height of the metal-free area
Figure 3-16
Flush installation
Table 3-7
Dimensions for flush installation
Dimensions in mm
a
b
h
MDS 404/514
10
10
20
MDS 402
10/0*
10
15
MDS 403
10
10
15
MDS 401
10/0*
–
9
MDS 506
40
40
40/60**
MDS 507
40
40
40
MDS 439 E
40
40
60
SLG 40/40-S
10
–
10
SLG 41/41-S
25
25
40
SLG 41C
20
20
30
SLG 42
30
30
40
SLG 43
>50
>30
40/60**
SLG 44
80
40
40/60**
SIM 4x
30
30
40
* See MDS description in chap. 4
** Recommended value
3-24
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.5.2
Effects of Metal on the Transmission Window
As already described in chapter 3.5.1, installation on metal can reduce the
size of the transmission window. The midpoint is shifted to the middle of the
SLG.
The figures below illustrate this point.
Installation of the
SLG on metal
In figure 3-17, a 30 x 30-cm iron plate is used as the mounting plate. The
surroundings of the MDS are free of metal.
SLG 41
with MDS 514:
SLG 42
with MDS 514:
Sa = 12 mm
Sa = 30 mm
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
M
20 mm
M
SLG 43
with MDS 506:
Sa = 80 mm
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
M
45 mm
M
When SLG 41 is
mounted on metal, virtually no reduction of the
transmission window
can be detected.
When SLG 42 and SLG 43 are
mounted at a 20-mm distance to
the metal, the transmission window achieves the normal size.
Effects of field length L:
= 100%
= 100%
= 98%
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
= 100%
= 100%
= 90%
M
115 mm
M
= 100%
= 100%
= 90%
Normal size of the transmission window
Transmission window after mounting the SLG at a 20-mm distance to metal (as recommended in the
catalog)
Transmission window after mounting the SLG on metal
Figure 3-17
Mounting the SLG on metal
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-25
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Mounting the MDS
on metal
In figure 3-18, a 30 x 30-cm iron plate is used as the mounting plate. The
SLG is operated in a metal-free environment.
SLG 41
with MDS 514:
SLG 42
with MDS 514:
Sa = 12 mm
Sa = 30 mm
ÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏ
ËËË
ÏÏÏ
ËËË
ÈÈÈ
ËËË
ÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ËËË
ÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏ
ËËË
ÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏ
ËËË
ÈÈÈ
M
SLG 43
with MDS 506:
Sa = 80 mm
ËËËËË
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËË
ÎÎÎ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËË
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËË
M
20 mm
M
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ËËËËËËËË
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
M
33 mm 1 45 mm
M
100 mm 1
115 mm
M
Effects of field length L:
= 100%
= 95%
= 85%
= 100%
= 96%
= 80%
= 100%
= 90%
= 75%
Normal size of the transmission window
Transmission window after mounting the MDS at a 20-mm distance to metal
Transmission window after mounting the MDS on metal
1
Figure 3-18
3-26
When the MDS (or MDS and SLG) is mounted directly on metal, the midpoint of the field is shifted to
the value shown.
Mounting the MDS on metal
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Effects of various
metals on the field
data
Table 3-8
Table 3-8 provides a summary of the figures shown on the preceding pages in
tabulated format. Details describing the effect of various metals on the SLG
and MDS have been added.
Reduction of the field data due to metal. Specifications in % as related to non-metal
Sg, Sa, L, B [%]
Mounted on metal
SLG 41 / MDS 514
SLG
MDS
SLG
+MDS
SLG 42 / MDS 514
SLG
MDS
SLG
+MDS
SLG 43 / MDS 506
SLG
MDS
SLG
+MDS
Reference non-metal
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Iron
Direct
100
80
75
75
75
50
65
85
50
20 mm
distance
100
95
90
95
100
85
95
90
95
Aluminum
Direct
100
80
75
65
80
55
65
85
50
20 mm
distance
100
95
95
95
100
90
95
95
95
Copper
Direct
100
75
80
75
85
65
75
75
50
20 mm
distance
100
100
95
100
95
95
100
90
90
S The table applies to a 30 x 30-cm metal plate. Reduction of the metal
plate to a minimum size will improve the field data.
S Flush installation of components in metal reduces the field data further.
A test is recommended when critical mounting configurations are involved.
S When working in one of the two transmission windows, it must be en-
sured that no metal rail (or similar) is located in the second transmission
window. The metal rail would also reduce the limit distance or the field
length.
S Remember that metal will shift the midpoint of the field to the middle of
the SLG.
S Distances of 40 mm or more to metal have virtually no more effect on the
field.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-27
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.5.3
Reduction of Metallic Effects
Interfering metal
carriers
Metal carrier
Non-metallic spacer
Sheet metal
ÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
MDS
Sa
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
MDS
Figure 3-19
3-28
Bad
A metal carrier is located over
the second transmission window of the SLG. This carrier affects the entire field. Particularly the transmission window
between SLG and MDS is reduced.
Metal
Good
The transmission window is
no longer affected when the
SLG is mounted differently.
Interfering metal carriers
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Flush installation
Non-metallic spacer
Sheet metal
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Metal
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
10-30 mm
x > 70 mm
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Figure 3-20
Although flush installation of
MDS and SLG is generally possible, the size of the transmission window is sharply reduced.
The following measures can be
used to counteract reduction of
the window.
Metal
Enlargement of the non-metallic spacer under the MDS and/
or SLG. MDS and/or SLG are
10 to 30 mm higher than the
metallic surroundings.
The value x > 70 mm applies
to the SLG 42 and SLG 43.
This value specifies that, at a
distance of x > 70 mm, the
SLG is no longer noticeably
affected by the metal.
Enlargement of non-metallic
distances a and b
The following rules of thumb
apply.
S Select a and b increased
with a factor of 2 to 3
S For SLG/MDS with large
limit distance (SLG
43/MDS 506), enlargement
of a and b has more effect
than for SLG/MDS with
small limit distance.
S This measure is not necessary for SLG 44/MDS 507.
Flush installation
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-29
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Installation of several SLGs on metal frame or carrier
Every SLG which is mounted on metal couples part of the field on the metal
carrier. When minimum distance D is maintained and metal-free areas a and
b are adhered to, there are usually no effects. However, when the location of
an iron frame is particularly poor, there may be some effects. This will lengthen data transmission times or causes sporadic error messages on the interface.
This point is particularly important when a long-range SLG is used (i.e., SLG
43/44).
Necessary actions
a) Using the service and test device and the “HELP” key + “A,” the presence of an inductive interference field can be proven. An LED on the
SLG 44 indicates the presence of such a field of interference.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
SLG A
D
SLG B
STG
Only SLG A is active. In the vicinity of SLG B, the field is measured on
the metal carrier. When an interference field appears on the display, the
following measures can be used to correct the situation.
b) Lengthen distance D between the two SLGs
c) Turn one or both SLGs by 90°. This rotates the inductive fields so that
they can no longer affect each other.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
3-30
SLG A
D
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
SLG B is rotated by 90°.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
!
Caution
Turning the SLG alters the physical mounting of the MDS.
d) Install one or more iron struts to short circuit the parasitic fields
SLG A
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
SLG B
e) Install a non-metallic spacer of 20 to 40 mm in thickness between the
SLG and the iron frame. This significantly reduces parasitic coupling of
the field on the carrier.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Non-metallic spacer
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
3-31
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.5.4
Using Side Lobes
In addition to the arrangement of MDS and SLG as described in chapter 3.1,
other arrangements within the transmission window are possible. With some
applications (e.g., assembly lines), this can help simplify a plant.
The following example shows how an MDS is processed from two different
sides.
SLG 41-S
Transmission window via side lobe
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
SLG 41-S
Normal transmission
window
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Pallet
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Pallet
SLG 41
Transmission window
via side lobes
MDS 403
Standing
MDS 403
Reclining
Conveyor
technology
SLG 41
Normal transmission window
(use of width B of the transmission window)
MDS 404
Pallet
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
SLG 41
Normal transmission window
Figure 3-21
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Pallet
SLG 41
Transmission window
via side lobe
Conveyor
technology
Assembly line with MDS 403 reclining or standing (top) and
MDS 404 (bottom)
The size of the side lobes can as large as the normal transmission window.
However, remember that a metallic environment greatly affects the size and
location of the side lobes. We recommend determining the side lobes with a
test setup in an actual environment (e.g., pallet).
3-32
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.5.5
Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Carriers
Polyamide
Table 3-9 provides an overview of chemical resistance of data memories
made of polyamide 12. It should be emphasized that the plastic housing is
very resistant to chemicals found in the automotive sector (e.g., oils, grease,
diesel fuel, gasoline and so on) which are not listed separately here.
Table 3-9
Chemical resistance of data memories made of polyamide 12
Concentration
20° C
60° C
30
F
j
J
J
Conc.
J
J
10
J
J
Benzine
J
Y
Bleaching lye (12.5% chlorine solution)
F
j
Butane, gaseous, liquid
J
J
Butyl acetate (acetic acid butylester)
J
J
n-butyl alcohol (n-butanol)
J
Y
Calcium chloride, w.
J
Y
J
Y
Chorine
j
j
Chrome baths, tech.
j
j
Battery acid
Ammonia, gaseous
Ammonia, w.
Calcium nitrate, w.
k.g.
Ferrous salts, w.
k.g.
J
J
Acetic acid, w.
50
j
j
Ethyl alcohol, undenatured
96
J
Y
50
J
J
30
Y
j
10
J
Y
Formalin
Y
j
Glycerin
J
J
Isopropanol
J
Y
J
J
F
j
Formaldehyde, w.
Caustic potash solution, w.
50
Lysol
Magnesium salts, w.
k.g.
J
J
Methyl alcohol, w.
50
J
J
Lactic acid, w.
50
F
j
10
Y
F
k.g.
J
J
Sodium carbonate, w. (soda)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-33
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Table 3-9
Chemical resistance of data memories made of polyamide 12
Concentration
20° C
60° C
k.g.
J
J
J
J
J
J
Y
F
f
V
Propane
J
J
Mercury
J
J
Sodium chloride, w.
Sodium hydroxide
Blue salts, w.
k.g.
Nitrobenzene
Phosphoric acid
10
Nitric acid
10
f
j
Hydrochloric acid
10
f
j
Slight
J
J
25
F
j
10
Y
j
Slight
J
J
Carbon tetrachloride
J
J
Toluol
J
Y
J
J
J
J
Sulfur dioxide
Sulfuric acid
Hydrogen sulfide
Laundry detergent
High
Softeners
Symbols:
J
Y
F
f
j
w.
k.g.
3-34
Resistant
Practically resistant
Somewhat resistant
Slightly resistant
Not resistant
Hydrous solution
Cold saturated
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS)
The housing of the heat-proof MDS 439 E data memory is made of polyphenylene sulfide (i.e., PPS). The chemical resistance of the data memory is
excellent. No known solvent can dissolve this substance below 200° C. Deterioration of the physical characteristics can be observed in hydrous solutions of hydrochloric acid (HCl) and nitric acid (HNO3) at 80° C.
Resistance to all types of fuel, including methanol, is very good. The table
below provides an overview of the chemicals tested.
Table 3-10
Chemical resistance of the MDS 439 E made of polyphenylene sulfide
Test Conditions
S bt
Substance
Acetone
n-butanol (butyl alcohol)
Butanone-2 (methylethylketone)
n-butyl acetate
Brake fluid
Calcium chloride (saturated)
Diesel fuel
Diethyl ether
Freon 113
Anti-freeze
Kerosene
Methanol
Motor oil
Sodium chloride (saturated)
Sodium hydroxide (30%)
Sodium hypochlorite (5%)
Caustic soda (30%)
Nitric acid (10%)
Hydrochloric acid (10%)
Sulfuric acid
(10%)
(10%)
(30%)
Test fuels
(FAM-DIN 51604-A)
Toluol
1, 1, 1-trichloroethane
Xylene
Zinc chloride (saturated)
Evaluation:
E l ti
Evaluation
Time
[Days]
Temperature
[° C]
180
180
180
180
40
40
180
40
40
180
40
180
40
40
180
30
180
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
180
55
80
60
80
80
80
80
23
23
120
60
60
80
80
80
80
80
93
23
80
23
80
23
80
80
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
/
–
+
+
–
+
/
+
+
/
180
80
+
180
180
180
40
80
75
80
80
/
+
+
+
+ Resistant, weight gain < 3% or weight loss < 0.5% and/or drop in resistance to tearing < 15%
/ Somewhat resistant, 3 to 8% weight gain or 0.5 to 3% weight loss and/or 15 to 30% drop in
resistance to tearing
– Not resistant, weight gain > 8% or weight loss > 3% and/or drop in resistance to tearing > 30%
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-35
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.6
Configuration with MDS 507 and SLG 44
3.6.1
Configuring the Presence Check
Since the MDS 507 requires current from the dialog battery for communication with the SLG 44, the MDS should only be processed when a data transfer is actually to be performed. If the user uses the presence check or the
filehandler, there is a danger that the MDS 507 battery will be drained in a
short time. This is particularly true when the MDS 507 stops opposite the
SLG and remains there.
The MDS battery would be dead in a few weeks.
For this reason, the ABTAST parameter was introduced for the MDS 507.
ABTAST is a time interval which should be configured realistically. A sample configuration is shown on the next few pages.
Function
S When no MDS is in the field, the field is continuously scanned for an
MDS as before. This ensures that an MDS command will be processed
immediately when the MDS enters the transmission window.
S When an MDS has been detected (i.e., MDS present), the surroundings of
the SLG are only scanned cyclically for an MDS. At the time intervals
specified by ABTAST, the ASM inquires whether the MDS is still present.
S When the MDS has left the field, continuous scanning begins again, and a
new MDS is detected immediately.
S When the user sends an MDS command, this command is processed immediately with the MDS regardless of ABTAST.
Note
If the MDS is removed from the field and a new MDS enters while the ABTAST time is running, the ASM does not detect a change in presence and
this information is not forwarded to the user.
Sample configuration of ABTAST
A train consists of several cars. An MDS is attached to the middle of each
car. Each car must be clearly identified (i.e., the user must be able to detect
the “non-presence” of an MDS after an MDS has left the field but before the
next MDS enters the field of the SLG).
Since the train, and thus the MDS, may remain stopped opposite an SLG for
a very long period of time, MDS dialog battery discharging should be optimized.
3-36
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
L
MDS
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
SLG
S1min
Vmax
S1min
L
=
=
=
50 km/h
20 m
2m
tNANW
=
80 msec
tABTAST
Figure 3-22
Maximum speed of the train at which the MDS is processed
Shortest distance between two data memories
Field length of the SLG with the MDS 507. Contrary to general configuration guidelines, the maximum possible field length of the SLG should be used here.
Time which the system requires to detect and report (constant) the “non-presence”
of an MDS
Maximum time to be configured between two scanning intervals between MDS and
SLG
Sample configuration of tABTAST: Train with several cars
The following relationship exists.
t ABTAST v
S1min * L
* t NANW
V max
t ABTAST v 20Ăm * 2Ăm * 0.08Ă sec + 1.296Ă sec * 0.08Ă sec
50Ăkmńh
t ABTAST v 1.2Ă sec
With this configuration, the MDS is processed at intervals of 1.2 sec for a
duration of 20 msec. If the MDS remains in front of the SLG for an entire
day, the MDS is only processed for the following time during one day.
t + 0.02Ăs @ 24Ăh + 0.4Ăh + 24Ă min
1.2Ăs
The battery of the MDS is only used 24 minutes per day. See also table 3-11.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-37
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
t [ sec ]
t
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
Process the MDS
Continuously scan field for an MDS
The SLG remains off during this time.
1s
13.9 m
L = Field length
40
tx
Speed triangle
The train travels 13.9 m (horizontal)
in 1 second (vertical). By connecting the two end points, one obtains
the slope of the straight line for
VMDS. Additional parallel lines are
drawn at the interval of S1 (20 m).
Figure 3-23
S
b
0
S1min
a
S1min
Direction of movement of the train
Diagram of the configuration (drawn to scale)
Requirements for maximum tABTAST
t ABTAST v t x * t NANW
as shown by the diagram: tx 1.3 sec
tx = Shown in the diagram: Time after which an MDS has left the field but
before the next MDS has entered the field of the SLG
a: MDS leaves the transmission window.
b: The next MDS enters the transmission window.
3-38
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.6.2
Parameterization of the MDS 507 in the Software
Special parameterization of the MDS 507 is required so that the presence
check can be set.
The value tABTAST must be calculated and then forwarded to the interface
module. The time tABTAST is stored in one byte which is coded as shown
below.
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
tABTAST :
Time value: 00* to 3F hex or 0* to 63
* 0 = Continuous field scanning
Time factor:
0 0 =
0.01 sec
0 1 =
0.1 sec
1 0 =
1.0 sec
1 1 =
10 sec
t ABTAST + Timefactor * timevalue
Figure 3-24
Coding for tABTAST
The following table provides several rules of thumb on the actual processing
time per day of an MDS which has stopped permanently in front of the SLG.
Table 3-11
Time
tABTAST
Actual processing time of an MDS
tABTAST
[ H]
MDS-Processing1
per Day
Min. Life Span of MDS Battery2
(100 h for Continuous Operation)
[ Sec ]
0
00
24 h
4.2 days
0.01
01
16 h
6.2 days
0.05
05
9.6 h
10.5 days
0.1
40
4,8 h
20 days
0.5
45
58 min
104 days
1
80
29 min
207 days
5
85
5.8 min
3 years
10
C0
2.9 min
> 5 years 3
50
C5
34 s
> 5 years 3
100
CA
17 s
> 5 years 3
1
2
3
The MDS is turned on for 20 msec for each ANW processing.
The values apply to an ambient temperature of Tu = 20° to 30° C.
Spontaneous discharge of the battery increases for higher ambient temperatures.
With an MDS battery older than 5 years, the life span of the battery is primarily determined by spontaneous discharge of the battery.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-39
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
FB 250
tABTAST is transferred via the FB parameter assignment TYP=3. DB ZUW
contains the following parameters.
0401, 0000
tABTAST is specified in the 1st byte of DB DAT (left-hand data byte).
ASM 410
With the ASM 410, the MDS 507 is parameterized via the PIO (bit 4 of byte
1). tABTAST is transferred in byte 4 of the PIO during the RESET command.
FB 230/FB 246/
FC 46
When FB 230 is called, tABTAST is set with the ABTA parameter. It is transferred as a hex value from 0000 to 00FF.
Bit 12 in BEST has the following meaning when used with the MDS 507.
1 = The dialog battery of the MDS 507 has passed below the threshold value.
FB 240/FC 44
MDS 507 operation is set via the M507 parameter when FB 240 is called.
M507 must be set to 1. tABTAST time is then transferred in the ABTA parameter.
FC 47/FB 47
MDS 507 operation is set via the MOBY=2 parameter when FC 47 is called.
tABTAST time is then transferred in the ABTA parameter.
FC 45
MDS 507 mode is enabled by setting the parameter MOBY_mode = 1
in UDT 10 of the FC 45 project. tABTAST is set with the parameter
scanning_time.
3-40
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.6.3
Extended Configuration Aids
The transmission
window
The figure below shows the real transmission window between the MDS 507
and the SLG 44.
Field length in
millimeters
1400
General conditions:
– Sa = 36 cm
– SLG with full receiving capacity
– Side lobes not shown
– Curves show the fields from the middle
of MDS to the middle of SLG.
1200
1000
800
600
400
200
Identification of the middle of the field on the
SLG
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
Window size in accordance with the standard configuration in the catalog
Switch-on window:
The MDS reports that it is ready in this window. The MDS must be located in this window so that its presence can be detected.
Processing window:
After the MDS has been activated in the inner window, the MDS can be processed
with commands in this window (i.e., either
statically or dynamically).
If the MDS has not been processed with a
command (or the presence check) for a time
of taus > 6 msec, it switches the electronics
to standby status. The MDS must be located in the inner window again when
another command is processed.
SLG 44
0
-200
-400
-600
-800
The MDS can still respond in this window.
This field occurs when the MDS is used with
the permanent presence check. Since this
window has little significance for the user, it
has been omitted in the diagrams which follow.
-1000
-1200
-1400
-600 -400 -200
0
200
400
600
Field width in
millimeters
Figure 3-25
Real transmission window between the MDS 507 and the SLG 44
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-41
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
This figure shows the middle of the transmission window in accordance with
the standard configuration. The real transmission window is usually larger
depending on various factors. On the next few pages, the transmission window is shown under different general conditions. The general conditions are
listed below.
S Operating distance
S Main lobe or main and side lobe
S Reduction of SLG receiving capacity
S Angle deviation
Main lobe with different operating distances
Sa = 12 cm
Sa = 36 cm
Field length in
mm
Sa = 74 cm
Field length
in mm
Field length
in mm
1400
1400
1400
1200
1200
1200
1000
1000
1000
800
800
800
600
600
600
400
400
400
200
200
SLG 44
200
SLG 44
SLG 44
0
0
0
-200
-200
-200
-400
-400
-400
-600
-600
-600
-800
-800
-800
-1000
-1000
-1000
-1200
-1200
-1200
-1400
-1400
MDS 507
-600 -400 -200
0
200
400
600
-600 -400 -200
Field width
in mm
Figure 3-26
3-42
-1400
MDS 507
0
200
400
600
Field width
in mm
MDS 507
-600 -400 -200
0
200
400
600
Field width
in mm
Main lobe with different operating distances
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Main and side lobes with different operating distances
Field length
1600
in mm
When operating distances are small (i.e.,
Sa = 100 mm, MDS = 300 mm), the width
of the field with main and side lobes is larger than the length of the field.
In the vicinity of the SLG, the transmission
gap between main and side lobes is no
longer detectable. The width of the transmission gap is approx. 2 mm.
1200
800
Sa = 12 cm
400
0
-400
-800
-1200
-1600
-1600-1200-800 -400
0
400
800 1200 1600
Field width
in mm
0
400
800 1200 1600
Field width
in mm
Field length
1600
in mm
1200
800
Sa = 36 cm
400
0
-400
-800
-1200
-1600
-1600-1200-800 -400
Field length
1600
in mm
1200
800
Sa = 74 cm
400
0
No side lobes are visible at an operating
distance of Sa > 600 mm.
-400
-800
-1200
-1600
-1600-1200-800 -400
Figure 3-27
0
400
800 1200 1600
Field width
in mm
Main and side lobes with different operating distances
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-43
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Reduction of SLG receiving capacity
Under interference-prone industrial conditions, the receiving capacity of the
SLG 44 can be reduced. Cf. chap. 3.6.5.
The figure below shows the transmission window of an SLG 44 with varying
receiving capacities. The switch-on window is shown for each.
Field length
in mm
1600
Sa = 30 cm
1200
800
400
Min. capacity (left setting on potentiometer)1
0
Middle-left setting on potentiometer1
-400
Middle-right setting on potentiometer
-800
Max. capacity (right setting on potentiometer)
-1200
1
-1600
-1600 -1200 -800 -400
Figure 3-28
3-44
0
400
800
1200
1600
No side lobes at Sa = 30 cm
Field width
in mm
Switch-on window for various receiving capacities
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Angle deviation
Field length
in mm
When the MDS 507 is used, the antennas of MDS and SLG must be aligned.
The following transmission windows result at an angle deviation (Φ).
Field length in
mm
Sa = 36 cm
F = 45 _
1600
1600
1200
1200
800
800
400
400
0
0
-400
-400
-800
-800
-1200
-1200
-1600
Sa = 36 cm
F = 90 _
-1600
-1600 -1200 -800 -400
0
400
800
1200 1600
-1600 -1200 -800 -400
0
400
800
Field width
in mm
Figure 3-29
1200 1600
Field
width in
mm
Switch-on window with various angle deviations
Distance D or D1
The following values are specified for the general configuration.
D + 6Ăm
(SLG SLG)
D1 + 4Ăm
(MDS MDS)
When these values are adhered to, there are usually no reciprocal influences
even when SLG and MDS are installed under poor conditions. However, the
actual space available often makes it impossible to adhere to these required
minimum distances.
It is frequently possible to underrange the minimum distances. Field measurement with suitable measuring instruments may have to be performed.
The following tables shows the absolute minimum distances (D).
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-45
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Configuration
1)
2)
3)
4)
SLG A
D
Sg
D
SLG A
D
SLG 44
5)
Max. sensitivity
D
MDS
SLG A
SLG B
SLG B
SLG A
Sg
MDS
SLG B
SLG B
2.4
3.0
3.1
4.2
Middle setting
1.8
1.8
2.9
3.5
Min. sensitivity
0.45
0.45
1.6
2.1
All specifications in meters (m)
1) Both SLGs have the main lobe pointed at each other. When the MDS (not shown) moves from SLG A to SLG B, the
configuration shown in column 3 results.
2) Both SLGs have the side lobes pointed at each other.
3) SLG A communicates with the MDS at the boundary of the main lobe. D is the minimum distance at which SLG B
stops receiving information from the MDS. The operating distance between MDS and SLG A is only a few
centimeters.
4) Setting of the receiving capacity is performed via the potentiometer as described in chapter 3.6.5 The strength of the
sending field remains unchanged at the maximum value.
Shows the direction of movement of an MDS
Sg The MDS is located on the boundary of the SLG.
5) Setting of the receiving capacity is performed via the potentiometer as described in chapter 3.6.5 The strength of the
sending field remains unchanged at the maximum value.
Applicable in general:
S The values in the table are based on non-metallic surroundings.
S Installation on metal may increase distance D significantly.
S The special definition of D1 (minimum distance MDS ↔ MDS) must be:
Two MDSs must never be located in the field of one SLG at the same
time. However, it must be remembered that metallic surroundings may
increase the limit distance (and thus D1). The transmission windows
shown in this chapter can be used for the configuration of D1 (but only
when D1 must be < 4 m).
S Since the values specified here are subject to tolerances, we recommend
configuring all values with + 20%.
Processing the
MDS 507 with the
SLG 42/43
There are 2 modes with which MDS 507 can be processed with SLG 42 or
SLG 43.
a) The dialog battery on the MDS 507 is okay.
S The field of the SLG 42/43 has the same shape as when working with
SLG 44. The middle of the field is the middle of the SLG.
S MDS 507 is direction-dependent.
S The field data of the MDS are sharply reduced in comparison to operation
with SLG 44.
S Rules of thumb for the limit distance
SLG 42 MDS 507: 150 mm
SLG 43 MDS 507: 300 mm
3-46
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
!
Caution
The distance from MDS to MDS (D1) must have the specified value. If D1
is not adhered to, other MDSs which appear not to be in the field may be
processed by mistake.
Remember that, when still approx. 1 to 3 m away from the SLG, the MDS
507 is switched on already by the field of the SLG 42/43. The battery of the
MDS will be discharged continuously when the MDS is located between the
stated Sg and 1 m. Between 1 and 3 m, the MDS can still be switched on
occasionally.
b) The dialog battery of the MDS 507 is discharged or does not exist.
S The MDS 507 can no longer be processed with the SLG 44.
S The MDS 507 has a receiving antenna for power transmission (i.e., the
MDS can be processed with the SLG 42/43 without a dialog battery).
S The data transmission of the MDS 507 is direction-dependent.
S Rules of thumb for the limit distance:
SLG 42 MDS 507: 70 mm
SLG 43 MDS 507: 100 mm
Due to the transmission of power to the MDS, the limit distances specified here are much smaller than the values listed under a).
S General functionality of the MDS 507 can always be checked in this operating mode.
S A dead dialog battery is not reported to the user when the MDS 507 is not
positioned in the middle. Cf. figure 3-30.
SLG 42
SLG 43
Sa = 25 mm
Figure 3-30
Transmission window of the MDS 507 with dead battery
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-47
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.6.4
Dead Battery Measurement and Changing the Battery for
MDS 507
Dead battery measurement with the STG
sa; sg
Dialog battery full:
Limit distance Sg is approx. 60 mm.
Dialog battery empty:
Limit distance Sg is approx. 25 mm.
Applicable in general:
The dialog battery is okay when MDS can be processed at
Sa > 40 mm.
Remember:
The dead battery message on the display of the STG is only indicated when the MDS is operated in the boundary area of communication (e.g., at Sa = 20 mm). When the MDS is operated close to
the STG (e.g., Sa = 10 mm), power transmission from STG to MDS
becomes so strong that no dead battery message is displayed even
though the battery is actually dead.
Figure 3-31
Dead battery measurement with the STG
Dead battery measurement with SLG 43
Dialog battery full:
Limit distance
Sg is approx. 340 mm.
Dialog battery empty:
Limit distance
Sg is approx. 50 to 100 mm.
Applicable in general:
The dialog battery is okay if the MDS can be processed at Sa > 50 mm and positioning of SLG to MDS
is in the middle, and if no dead battery message is
indicated.
Remember:
The dead battery message will not be generated correctly
when the MDS is not positioned in the middle.
Figure 3-32
3-48
Dead battery message with SLG 43
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Changing the
battery
a) Unlock the four housing locking mechanisms.
b) At the lower ends, press the locks simultaneously towards the inside, and
lift the upper part of the housing with the electronics.
Note
Temperature fluctuations can create a semi vacuum inside the MDS making
it difficult to lift the upper part of the housing. If this happens, use a small
screw driver to separate the upper part of the housing from the lower part
while pressing the locking mechanisms at the same time.
c) Open the battery compartment with a crosstip screw driver.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-49
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
d) Using the plug-in terminal, remove the used battery block from the MDS
and install the new battery block. Install cable, plug connector and battery in the battery compartment as shown.
The battery voltages can be checked as
shown in the adjacent drawing.
New
Battery
Red
Bad
Battery
U2
Blue
1
U1
U2
U1
3.1 V
9.3 V
< 2.7 V < 7.9 V
–
RL = 1 kW1
–
Black
1
!
White
To measure voltage U2, install a load resistor (RL = 1 kΩ) in parallel to the measuring instrument. This is particularly important for bad batteries.
Caution
Use original replacement batteries only.
e) Place cover on battery compartment, and tighten the screws slightly. The
clamps on the cover of the battery compartment should now hold the new
batteries in place. This can be checked by shaking the MDS. There
should be no rattling inside.
3-50
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
f) Place the MDS back on the housing cover (1), and close the locking mechanisms (2).
1
2
g) Before being used again, the MDS 507 must be initialized or formatted.
!
Caution
The contents of the RAM are lost when the battery is changed. If necessary,
the user data can be stored intermediately on an STG.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-51
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.6.5
Reducing the Sensitivity of the SLG 44
The measures described in this chapter are only required when the SLG is
receiving excessive interference from other devices. Such interference is
indicated by the yellow LED on the SLG.
Reducing the receiving capacity
A reduction of the receiving capacity should not be necessary when all components of a system adhere to the guidelines on radio technology. The sensitivity of an SLG 44 should not be reduced before system interference is correctly suppressed. To accomplish this, follow the steps below.
1. Install the SLG, and make sure that no MDS is in the vicinity. If the yellow LED goes on, this means that the location at which the SLG is installed is causing interference. The receiving capacity of the SLG must be
reduced.
2. Turn the potentiometer counter clockwise until the yellow LED goes off.
3. Move an MDS 507 into the field of the SLG 44. The green LED indicates how great the limit distance still is with reduced sensitivity.
Potentiometer to reduce
receiving capacity of the
SLG
Protective cap
(removed)
Limit Distance at Reduced Sensitivity
(Approx. Values)
To the right
1m
Middle position
0.65 m
To the left
0.3 m
Factory setting:
“To the right” corresponds to maximum sensitivity.
Figure 3-33
3-52
Reduction of the receiving capacity of the SLG 44
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
!
Caution
The sending strength of the SLG is retained even when the receiving capacity is reduced. This creates an area in the boundary area of the SLG in
which the MDS has already been switched on but the SLG cannot yet communicate with the MDS. Measures should be provided in the system to prevent an MDS from remaining overly long in the boundary area of an SLG
whose receiving capacity has been reduced.
When an MDS does remain in this boundary area for a longer period of time
anyway (e.g., several days), premature failure of the MDS battery must be
expected.
If this happens, the strength of the sending field can be reduced. Since this
involves a manipulation of the circuitry, only authorized personnel may perform this task.
The procedure is described in the next section.
Option: Reduction of the strength of the sending field
!
Caution
The following procedure involving the circuitry of the SLG 44 may only be
performed by authorized personnel.
The procedure may only be performed when the voltage is off. The EMC/
ESD protective measures for electronic circuits must be adhered to.
Reduction of the strength of the sending field of the SLG 44 may become
necessary under one or more of the following conditions.
S An MDS remains in the boundary area of a “sensitivity-reduced” SLG for
a long period of time.
S A second SLG is to be positioned in the immediate vicinity.
The receiving capacity of the SLG must have already been reduced as described above before the measures below may be performed.
The SLG 44 is always delivered with maximum sending field strength. The
sending field strength is reduced by soldering in short-circuit jumpers in the
electronics. The following steps must be performed.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-53
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
a) After removing the eight crosstip screws, open the cover of the SLG 44.
Figure 3-34
Opening the cover of the SLG 44
b) On the protruding soldering bases (A, B, C and D), solder in 1 to 4 soldered jumpers with an electronics soldering iron.
Soldered jumpers for reduction of the
sending field strength of the SLG
ABCD
Service plug connector for
programming the SLG
Figure 3-35
3-54
Antenna measuring points
(An anti-resonance resistor can be soldered in here as an option instead of the
soldered jumpers.)
Soldered jumpers and antenna measuring points on the SLG 44
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Table 3-12
Limit distance Sg for reduced sending field strength
Jumper
Sg
None
1m
A+D
0.9 m
A+D+B
0.8 m
A+D+B+C
0.5 m
These limit distances have been measured for an SLG with full receiving
capacity.
When setting the jumpers, make sure that the range of the sending field
strength is smaller than or equal to the receiving range.
c) A test should be performed before the SLG is closed again. Several jumper combinations may have to be tested.
d) Identification of the hardware status
The modified status of the SLG must be marked on the outside. A label
with date and jumpers used must be affixed next to the SLG plug connector.
Date ...
Jumpers:
Figure 3-36
Label for identification of the hardware status
e) Close the housing as shown below.
!
Caution
Fulfillment of protection rating IP65 requires that the SLG be provided with
a new seal.
Carefully place new seal on the cover. Place the SLG on top, and press together.
Make sure that the seal is not pinched. Then tighten the screws.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-55
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.7
Configuration with MDS 439 E (Heat-Proof)
3.7.1
Temperature Dependency of the Transmission Window
With the exception of the limit distance and the field length at temperatures
in excess of 85° C, the same guidelines as described in chap. 3.1 for the other
MDSs apply to the configuration of heat-proof data memories. For example,
the calculation of the transmission window includes the factor 0.8, and the
production tolerances and temperature influences up to 85° C have been considered. However, this factor is not a constant. Instead, it is a function of the
temperature which must be considered when 85° C (up to 110° C) is exceeded (i.e., when the mean temperature inside the data memory exceeds
85° C, an additional offset factor must be included in the calculation).
t v[Tt85Ă°ĂC] + L @ 0.8
V MDS
S g[Tu85Ă°ĂC] + S g @ C
L [Tu85Ă°ĂC] + L @ C
[m ]
t v[Tu85Ă°ĂC] + L @ C @ 0.8
V MDS ƪ mńsec ƫ
L
Sg
VMDS
C
tV
3-56
=
=
=
=
=
Field length
Limit distance between MDS - SLG
Speed of the MDS
Offset factor for temperatures > 85° C (cf. figure 3-37)
Transmit period of the MDS
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
C [Offset factor]
1,10
1,05
1,00
0,95
0,90
MDS 439 E
0,85
0,80
0,75
0,70
0
Figure 3-37
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
T [° C]
Offset factor C in relation to the temperature
The following chart shows the reduction of the limit distance and the field
length under excessive processing temperatures (i.e., inner temperatures of
the MDS).
[%]
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
20
Figure 3-38
MDS 439 E
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110
Interior temperature [° C]
Reduction of field length and limit distance
The decrease in field data under high temperatures is caused by the higher
current consumption of the electronics.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-57
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.7.2
Temperatures During Cyclic Operation
Cyclic operation is not required for ambient temperatures up to 110° C (i.e.,
up to this temperature, the MDS can be used continuously).
For ambient temperatures > 110° C, it must be ensured that the interior temperature of the MDS does not exceed the critical threshold (i.e., 110° C).
Each period of heating up must be followed by a period of cooling off. Several limit cycles are shown in the following table.
Table 3-13
Limit cycles of the temperature for MDS 439 E
Tu (Heating Up)
Heating Up
Tu (Cooling Off)
Cooling Off
220° C
0,5 h
25° C
>2h
200° C
1h
25° C
>2h
190° C
1h
25° C
> 1 h 45 min
180° C
2h
25° C
>5h
170° C
2h
25° C
>4h
The interior temperature of the MDS follows an e-function. This makes it
possible to calculate in advance the interior temperature or the functionality
of the MDS. This is particularly important for applications in which temperature is a critical factor or which work with a complex temperature profile.
Note
On request, Siemens will calculate the temperature curves.
A precise knowledge of the interior temperature simplifies configuration of
applications in which temperature is a critical factor.
!
Caution
Ambient temperatures > 220° C
Exposing the data memories to ambient temperatures over 220° C will invalidate all rights to warranty claims.
However, physical stability is maintained up to 230° C!
3-58
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Example of a
cyclic process
Table 3-14
Typical temperature profile of an application in a paint shop
Time Duration
(Min.)
Ambient Temperature (° C)
KTL bath
20
30
KTL dryer
60
200
Transport
60
25
PVC dryer
25
170
Transport
60
25
Filler dryer
60
160
Transport
60
25
Base coat dryer
60
120
Transport
60
25
Wax dryer
25
100
Transport
150
25
Start of MDS at i-Point
Temperature
[_C]
KTL
dryer
200
PVC
dryer
Filler
dryer
150
Base coat
dryer
50
KTL bath
100
Wax
dryer
0
0
Figure 3-39
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
650 [min]
Time
Diagram of the temperature progression from table 3-14
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-59
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
The results of the simulation are listed below.
After a simulation time of 36.5 hours, a total of 3 cycles were passed
through, and an interior temperature of 90 degrees Centigrade was reached.
Temperature
[_C]
Maximum interior temperature
inside the MDS (in this example)
Ambient temperature
200
180
160
Interior temperature of the
MDS
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000 [min]
Time
Figure 3-40
3-60
Complete temperature progression during simulation
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.7.3
Life Span of the Mobile Data Memory
The life span of the data memory is affected by several factors.
S Life span of the electronics
S Number of temperature cycles
S Type of temperature cycles
S Number of write-accesses
S Aging of the housing
S Aging of the heat insulation
S Frequency of write-accesses
S Data retention time of the EEPROM
S Mechanical stress
The frequency of write-accesses is the primary factor affecting the life
span of the data memory.
Operation with ECC driver
The ECC driver provides additional security on the correctness of MDS data.
The manufacturer of the data memory guarantees only 10,000 write-accesses.
When the ECC driver is used, the user is ensured the same data security up to
the actual end of the MDS life span.
Notes on ECC use
S Accesses times to MDS data are increased (i.e., less data can be processed
during dynamic operation).
S The net capacity of the MDS is reduced.
S When a data correction is performed, the result may be delayed by as
much as one second.
!
Caution
Interior temperature > 110° C
When the MDS is used at an interior temperature > 110° C, all rights to
guarantee claims are invalidated. The data contents of the EEPROM may be
lost at interior temperatures > 110° C. An error message is generated during
the next processing procedure, and the error status can be corrected by initializing the MDS.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-61
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.8
EMC Guidelines
3.8.1
Foreword
The EMC guidelines contain the following information.
S Why are the EMC guidelines necessary?
S What interference affects the controller from the outside?
S How can interference be prevented?
S How can interference be corrected?
S Which standards apply to the EMC guidelines?
S Examples of an interference-suppressed system setup
The description is directed to “qualified personnel.”
S Configuration engineers and planners who plan system configuration with
the MOBY modules and who must adhere to the required guidelines
S Skilled personnel and service engineers who install the connection cables
based on this description or who can correct deficiencies in this area when
a malfunction occurs.
!
3-62
Warning
Non-adherence to especially highlighted notes can cause dangerous states in
the system or destroy either single components or the entire system.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.8.2
General
The continuously growing use of electrical and electronic devices brings with
it the following characteristics.
S Greater concentration of components
S Increasing capacity of power electronics
S Rising switching speeds
S Lower current consumption of the components
The higher the degree of automation, the greater the danger that devices will
interfere with one another.
Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., EMC) is the ability of a piece of electrical or electronic equipment to function correctly in an electromagnetic environment without interfering with or adversely affecting its surroundings
within certain limits.
EMC can be divided into three areas.
S Intrinsic interference immunity
Resistance to internal (i.e., own) electrical interference
S Free interference immunity
Resistance to external electromagnetic interference
S Degree of interference emission
Interference emission and effects of the electrical environment
All three areas are included in the test of an electrical device.
MOBY modules are tested for adherence to certain limit values. Since
MOBY modules are only one of many components in a total system and the
combination of various components may also create sources of interference,
certain guidelines must be adhered to when setting up a system.
EMC measures usually consist of an entire package of measures all of which
must be taken in order to obtain an interference-immune system.
Note
S The system provider is responsible for adherence to the EMC guidelines,
while the user is responsible for the interference suppression of the complete system.
S All measures taken while the system is being set up will eliminate the
need for expensive modifications and removal of interference sources
later.
S Although the regulations of specific countries must also be adhered to,
this information is not covered in the documentation.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-63
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.8.3
Spreading of Interference
Three factors are required before interference can affect a system.
S Source of interference
S Coupling path
S Potentially susceptible equipment
Interference source
Ex: A drive
Figure 3-41
Coupling path
Ex: A MOBY cable
Potentially susceptible
device
Ex: An SLG 43
Spreading of interference
If one of these factors is missing (e.g., the coupling path between the source
of the interference and the potentially susceptible device), the susceptible
device will not be affected even when strong interference is being emitted.
The EMC measures affect all three factors to prevent any malfunctions
caused by interference. When a system is set up, the provider must take all
possible measures to prevent the creation of sources of interference.
S Only equipment which meets limit value class A of VDE 0871 may be
used in a system.
S All interference caused by devices must be suppressed. This includes all
coils and windings.
S The layout of the cabinet must be such that reciprocal interference of the
individual components is avoided or kept as low as possible.
S Measures must be taken to eliminate interference from external sources.
The next few chapters provide information and tips on how to set up a system.
3-64
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Sources of interference
It is necessary to be familiar with the most frequent sources of interference in
order to achieve a high degree of electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., a very
low degree of interference in the environment) in a system. These sources of
interference must be eliminated by taking appropriate measures.
Table 3-15
Interference sources: Origin and effects
Interference Source
Interference Origin
Effect on Potentially Susceptible Equipment
Contactor, electronic
valves
l
Contacts
Power network malfunctions
Coils
Magnetic field
Electric motor
Collector
Electrical field
Winding
Magnetic field
Contacts
Electrical field
Transformer
Magnetic field, power network
malfunction, equalizing currents
Power pack, switchedmode
Circuit
Electrical and magnetic field,
power network malfunction
High-frequency devices
Circuit
Electromagnetic field
Sender (e.g., industrial
radios)
Antenna
Electromagnetic field
Difference in grounding
or reference potential
Voltage difference
Equalizing currents
Operator
Static charging
Electrical discharging currents,
electrical field
High-voltage current cable
Current flow
Electrical and magnetic field,
power network malfunction
High-voltage cable
Voltage difference
Electrical field
Electric welding device
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-65
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Coupling paths
A coupling path is required before interference generated by the source can
take effect. There are four kinds of interference coupling.
I
N
T
E
R
F
E
E
N
C
E
Galvanic coupling path
MOBY
ASM o.
SLG
Capacitive coupling path
MOBY
ASM o.
SLG
Inductive coupling path
S
O
U
R
C
E
MOBY
ASM o.
SLG
Emission coupling
Figure 3-42
MOBY
ASM o.
SLG
P
O
T
E
N
T
I
A
L
L
Y
S
U
S
C
E
P
T
I
B
L
E
D
E
V
I
C
E
The four kinds of interference coupling
When MOBY modules are used, various components of the total system can
act as coupling paths.
Table 3-16
Causes of coupling paths
Cause
Coupling Path
Cables and lines
Incorrect or unfavorable installation
Missing or incorrectly connected shields
Cables spaced unfavorably
Switching cabinet or
SIMATIC housing
h i
Missing or incorrectly wired equalizing line
Missing or incorrect grounding
Cables spaced unfavorably
Modules not installed securely
Poor cabinet layout
3-66
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.8.4
Cabinet Layout
User influence on the configuration of an interference-immune system includes the cabinet layout, cable installation, grounding connections and correct shielding of lines.
Note
For notes on correct cabinet layout in accordance with EMC guidelines, see
the layout guidelines of the SIMATIC controller.
Shielding via
housing
Metal housings for potentially susceptible equipment can be used to keep out
magnetic and electrical fields and electromagnetic waves. The better the
induced interference current can flow, the greater the spontaneous weakening
of the field of interference. All sheet metal on the housings or sheet metal in
the cabinet must be well connected together (i.e., with a high degree of conductivity).
Figure 3-43
Shielding via housing
When the sheet metal parts of switching cabinets are insulated against each
other, a high-frequency conductive connection with the ribbon cables and
high-frequency terminals or HF conductive paste can be created. The greater
the connection surface, the better the high-frequency conductive capacity.
This cannot be achieved by connection with simple wires.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-67
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Avoiding
interference via
optimal layout
Good interference diversion is achieved by installing SIMATIC controllers on
conductive mounting plates (unpainted). When setting up the switching cabinet, interference can be easily avoided by adhering to guidelines. Power
components (e.g., transformers, drives and load power supplies) should be
installed separately (i.e., separated by space) from the controller components
(e.g., relay controllers and SIMATIC S5).
The following basic principles apply.
1. The effect of interference decreases, the greater the distance between interference source and potentially susceptible equipment.
2. Interference is further reduced by installing shielding plates.
3. Load lines and high-voltage current cables must be installed separately
from the signal lines at a distance of at least 10 cm.
PS
CPU/EU
Shielding
plate
Drive
Figure 3-44
3-68
Avoidance of interference via optimal layout
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Filtering the
supply voltage
External interference from the power network can be avoided by installing
power network filters. In addition to correct dimensioning, proper installation is very important. It is imperative that the power network filter be installed directly at the entrance to the cabinet. Interference currents are filtered out early at the entrance and not conducted through the cabinet.
Right
Wrong
Power filter
Is
Power filter
Is
IS = Interference current
Figure 3-45
Filtering the supply voltage
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-69
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.8.5
Avoiding Interference Sources
Sources of interference in a system must be avoided so that a higher degree
of interference immunity can be achieved. All circuited inductivities are a
frequent cause of interference in a system.
Interference
suppression of
inductivities
Since relays, contactors and so on generate interference voltages, this interference must be suppressed with one of the following circuits.
When the coil is switched, up to 800 V can be created on 24 V coils even
with small relays. Several kV of interference voltagecan be created on 220 V
coils. By using free-wheeling diodes or RC circuitry, the interference voltage
is prevented and, with it, the inductive interference in the lines parallel to the
coil lines.
Relay coils
Valves
Contactors
Brakes
Figure 3-46
Suppression of inductive interference
Note
All coils in the cabinet must be interference-suppressed. Values and motor
brakes are frequently forgotten. Fluorescent lamps in the switching cabinet
must be subjected to a special test.
3-70
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.8.6
Equipotential Bonding
Differing layouts of the system parts and differing voltage levels can cause
differences in potential between the parts of a system. When the system parts
are connected via signal lines, equalizing currents flow through these signal
lines. These equalizing currents can distort the signals.
This makes correct equipotential bonding imperative.
S The cross section of the equipotential bonding line must be large enough
(i.e., at least 10 mm2).
S The space between signal cable and related equipotential bonding line
must be kept as small as possible (i.e., antenna effect).
S A fine-wire line must be used (i.e., better conduction of high frequencies).
S When connecting equipotential bonding lines to the central equipotential
bonding rail, power components and non-power components must be
combined.
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 2
Power pack
EU
Wrong
EU
EU
PLC
Wrong
Drive
Figure 3-47
Equipotential bonding
The better the equipotential bonding in a system, the smaller the chance of
interference caused by fluctuations in potential.
Equipotential bonding should not be confused with the protective grounding
of a system. Protective grounding prevents the creation of excessive touch
voltages when devices malfunction.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-71
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.8.7
Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY
L+
230 V
24 V
R
R
ASM
R
R
Ungrounded
power pack
Ground fault monitoring device. When a
voltage asymmetry against protective
ground occurs on lines L+ or L–, the current circuit is interrupted.
Figure 3-48
SLG
Interface to the computer or PC
To connect a grounded computer or PC, the connection must contain a galvanic decoupler (e.g.,
optocoupler).
Circuit diagram of the principle of grounding fault monitoring
SIMATIC with
ASM 400/401
3-72
L–
The SIMATIC is a grounded system. In the power pack of the SIMATIC, 0 V
(i.e., signal ground) is connected to the housing. On the ASM 400/401, the
0 V signal of the external 24 V power pack is connected with 0 V of the SIMATIC. The connection between the ASM 400/401 (SIMATIC) and the SLG
is equipotentially bonded (i.e., RS 422 interface without galvanic isolation).
A direct setup with grounding fault monitoring is not possible. Proceed as
described in the SIMATIC manual if grounding fault monitoring is necessary.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
SIMATIC PLC 100U
with ASM 410
ASM 410
C
P
U
PLC 100U
SLG
Galvanic isolation
230 V
24 V
Figure 3-49
Grounding
fault monitoring
SIMATIC PLC 100U with ASM 410
The ASM 410 is equipped with galvanic isolation to the SIMATIC CPU. A
layout with grounding fault monitoring is simple.
Serial interface
SIM
The SIM is available with RS 422, V.24 and TTY interfaces.
A layout with grounding fault monitoring requires galvanic isolation (i.e., a
layout with the TTY interface).
SIM
- TTY C
P
U
PLC 100U
SLG
Galvanic isolation
230 V
24 V
Figure 3-50
Grounding
fault monitoring
Serial interface SIM with TTY interface
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-73
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.8.8
Shielding the Cables
To suppress interference in the signal cables, these cables must be shielded.
The best shielding effect is achieved by installation in steel piping. However,
this is only necessary when the signal lines must pass through an interference-prone environment. In most cases, the use of cables with braided
shields is sufficient. In either situation, correct connection is decisive for the
shielding action.
Note
A shield which is not connected at all or is connected incorrectly has no
shielding effect.
The following principles apply.
S For analog signal lines, the shield connection must be one-sided and on
the receiver side.
S For digital signal lines, the shield connection must be two-sided on the
housing.
S Since interference signals are frequently in the HF range (i.e., > 10 kHz),
connection of the HF-capacity shield must be provided over a large surface.
Figure 3-51
Shielding of the cables
The shield rail must be connected to the housing of the switching cabinet
over a large surface (i.e., good conductivity) and must be located as close to
the cable lead-in as possible. The cables must be bared and clamped (highfrequency clamp) to the shield rail or bound with cable binders. The position
must have good conductivity.
3-74
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Cable binder
Remove
paint
Figure 3-52
Connection of the shield rail
The shield rail must be connected with the protective ground (PE) rail.
When shielded cables must be interrupted, the shield must also be applied to
the plug connector housing. Only suitable plug connectors may be used.
Shield turned up backwards
by 180° and connected with
the plug connector housing
ÔÔÔÔÔ
ÖÖÖÖ
ÖÖÖÖ
Figure 3-53
Rubber sleeve
Interruption of shielded cables
When adapter plugs which do not have suitable shield termination are used,
the shield must be continued through cable clamps to the point of interruption. This ensures a large-surface, HF conductive connection.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-75
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.8.9
Basic Rules on EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., EMC) can often be ensured by following
a few elementary rules. Rules which apply to the layout of the cabinet are
listed below.
Shielding via
housing
S Protect the programmable controller from external interference by installing it in a cabinet or housing. The cabinet or the housing must be included in the grounding connection.
S Shield electromagnetic fields of inductivity from the programmable controller with separator plates.
S Use metallic plug housings for shielded data transmission lines.
Large-surface
grounding
connection
S Connect all inactive metal parts with low HF resistance over a large surface.
S Provide a large-surface connection between the inactive metal parts and
the central grounding point.
S Remember to connect the shield rail to ground (i.e., a large-area connection of the shield rail to ground must be provided).
S Aluminum parts should not be used for grounding connections.
Planning the
cabling
S Organize the cables into groups, and install these groups separately.
S Always install high-voltage current lines and signal lines in separate ducts
or bundles.
S Introduce all cabling into the cabinet from only one side and, if possible,
at one level.
S Install the signal lines as close to the grounding surfaces as possible.
S Twist the feeder and return conductors of individually installed conductors.
3-76
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Shielding the lines
S Shield the data transmission lines, and apply the shield on both sides.
S Shield the analog lines, and apply the shield on one side (e.g., on the
drive).
S Always apply the line shields at the cabinet entrance to the shield rail
over a large surface, and secure these with clamps.
S Continue the applied shield without interruption to the module.
S Use braided shields and not foil shields.
Power supply and
signal filter
S Only use power supply filters with metal housings.
S Connect the filter housing (i.e., connection must be low HF resistant and
over a large surface) to cabinet ground.
S Never secure the filter housing to painted surfaces.
S Secure the filter at the cabinet entrance or in the direction of the interference source.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-77
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.9
Concept of MOBY Shielding
With MOBY I, the data are transferred between ASM and SLG over an
RS 422 interface at a speed of 19200 baud. The distance between ASM and
SLG may be up to 1000 m. MOBY cable installation should be treated the
same as that of a data processing system. Special attention should be paid to
shielding of all data cables. The following figures show the primary points
required for a secure layout.
Ï
Ï
Grounding rail for all shielded cables. It must be located
as close as possible to the cable lead-in in the cabinet.
The rail must be grounded to the cabinet over a large
surface and use short connections.
Additional
SLGs
The cable shield is applied to the SLG plug
connector on the appropriate shield pin. The
cable shield of the SLG
may not be applied to a
grounded point (i.e., no
grounding clamp).
230 V
24 V
Additional power consumers
Each cabinet is
centrally grounded. The cable jacket of the SLG cables must be bared
directly at the cable lead-in. A shield clamp is
used for the connection of the cable shield to the
grounding rail. This will divert interference volThe voltage supply of the SLGs should be provided by the
tages of + 2.5 kV on the SLG cable. Careful shield
2-pole plug connector on the ASM. The ASM is equipped
connection is particularly important for long cables
with electrical fuses and a filter circuit against interference
or interference-prone industrial environments.
peaks. This filters out interference peaks and frequencies
which may be caused by “additional power consumers.”
Figure 3-54
3-78
Simple layout with ASM 400/401
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Layout of an
S7-300 with MOBY
When connecting the SLG to the ASM 470/475, it is essential that a shield
connection terminal be used for the cable shield. Shield connection terminals
and holders are standard components of the S7-300 product family.
Shield connecting
element
Shield connection terminal
Cable to SLG 1
Figure 3-55
Connection of
other modules
(e.g., ASM 410)
Cable to SLG 2
Layout of the ASM 470/475 with shield connecting element
To divert interference which may occur on the connection cable to the SLG,
proceed as described for the ASM 400.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-79
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.10
Cable and Plug Connector Assignments
The cable jacket of SLG connection cables used with MOBY is made of
polyurethane (i.e., PUR in accordance with VDE 0250). This ensures very
good cable resistance to oils, acids, caustic solutions and hydraulic fluids.
3.10.1
Cable Configuration
The cable between ASM and SLG requires six cores + shield. Four of these
cores are assigned to the serial data interface. The power supply of the SLG
requires two cores. The data can be transferred over distances of up to
1000 m, almost without regard to the diameter of the wire.
Since voltage is present on the connection cable due to the current consumption of the SLG, permitted cable lengths are usually shorter than 1000 m.
The length depends on the current consumption of the SLG and the ohmic
resistance of the connection cable.
Please also observe the information in chapter 6.8 “Setup and Function”
when using a Serial Interface Module (SIM).
The following table gives an overview of permissible cable lengths.
Table 3-17
Cable configuration
ConResisSLG 40/SLG 41
SLG 42
SLG 43
SLG 44
Con(I = 90 mA) Max. (I = 180 mA) Max. (I = 250 mA) Max. (I = 80 mA) Max.
ductor ductor tance
DiaΩ/km1
Cable Length at
Cable Length at
Cable Length at
Cable Length at
Cross
Sec
meter
Section in in mm
UV=24V UV=30V UV=24V UV=30V UV=24V UV=30V UV=24V UV=30V
mm2
1
2
0.07 2
0.3 2
550
120
240
40
100
30
70
90
200
0.2
0.5
185
360
720
120
300
85
210
250
650
0.5
0.8
0.8
2
1.5
2
70
950
1000
310
790
230
570
700
1000
1.0
2
50
1000
1000
440
1000
320
800
1000
1000
1.4
2
24
1000
1000
920
1000
660
1000
1000
1000
The resistance values are average values. They refer to the forward and return conductors. A single wire has half the
resistance.
Use of these conductor cross sections requires crimp contacts (not included) in the SLG connection plug.
Field with gray background:
Recommended by Siemens: Standard cable, LiYC11Y, 6 x 0.25, shielded. The cable is available from Siemens under
the order number 6GT2 090-0A...
Gounding of
the SLG cable
We recommend always applying the shield of the SLG cable to a grounding
rail over a large surface.
Cable with drag
capability
The SLG/SIM can also be connected with a cable that can be dragged.
Recommended cable type: HPM Paartronic 3340-C-PUR 3 x 2 x 0.25.
The cable can be made by the customer.
3-80
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Supplementary
power pack for
SLG
When a supplementary power pack is installed in the vicinity of the SLG, the
maximum cable length (i.e., 1000 m) between ASM and SLG can always be
used.
ÏÏ
Note
The 24 V power supply line
(i.e., pin 2 in the SLG plug) may
not be connected to the ASM.
6-core (with 24 V connection)
SLG
24 V =
90 230 V
ÏÏ
Figure 3-56
1000 m (max.)
SLG with supplementary power pack
The power pack shown in the drawing is available from Siemens under order
number 6GT2 494-0AA00 (see chapter 7.2).
The customer must provide the cable from the supplementary power pack to
the SLG.
Note
The power pack can also be used as the main power pack for the ASM 400,
ASM 424 or ASM 454. See figure 3-57.
Ï
SLG
Pin assignment on
the socket connector
1, 4
2, 3
Ï
24 V =
6GT2 494-0AA00
Figure 3-57
GND
+24 Volt
230 V
MOBY wide-range power pack on the ASM 400
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-81
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.10.2
Plug Connector Assignment
Plug connector assignment of the SLG plug connector1
Table 3-18
Plug connector on the
SLG
2
Pin
1
6
3
5
4
Designation
1
– Receiving
2
+ 24 Volt
3
Ground (0 V)
4
+ Sending
5
– Sending
6
+ Receiving
Cable sield
1
This plug connector applies to SLG 40, SLG 41, SLG 42, SLG 43 and SLG 44.
Table 3-19
Plug connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D plug
connector1
Pin
9-pin subminiature D
plug connector with
screw-type lock
1
Not used
2
+ Sending
3
+ Receiving
4
Not used
5
- Receiving
6
- Sending
7
Ground (0 V)
8
+24 Volt (see caution note)
9
Not used
Geh.
1
Desigantion
Cable shield
This plug connector assignment applies to:
ASM 400, ASM 424, ASM 454, ES 030 => SLG
ASM 400, ASM 410 (STG plug connector).
Note
When making your own cables, remember that the “sending” signal of the
SLG must be connected to the “receiving” signal of the ASM,and vice versa.
!
3-82
Caution
When using the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG, do not
wire the +24 Volt pin to the ASM. Cf. table 3-19.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Installing the SLG
plug connector
If the SLG plug connector has to be turned in a different direction when using
a prefabricated cable, proceed as shown in the drawing below to position the
contact support differently.
The plug connector on the SLG cannot be turned.
Knurled screw for solid connections (no tools needed)
Removable housing cover
for easy mounting
Cage-claw cable retainer
Crimp contacts for
use even with strong
vibration*
Secure the contact
support in 7 positions.
* Crimp snap-on connector available from:
Hirschmann
D-72606 Nuertingen
Tel: 07127/14-1479
Type: XZC0700
Order no: 932 507-001
Figure 3-58
Drawing of mounting the SLG plug connector
Ordering data
Table 3-20
Ordering data for the SLG plug connector
SLG-side, 6-pin plug with socket contacts for crimping
with bent output
(Contact support must be secured in 7 positions.)
S 1 each
S 1 package (10 each)
6GT2 090-0BA00
6GT2 090-0BA10
with straight output
S 1 each
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6GT2 090-0UA00
3-83
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.10.3
Connection Cables
Connection cable
for ASM 400/401/
424/454,
ES 030 ↔ SLG
6GT2 091-0A...
or
6GT2 091-2A...
9-pin subminiature2
D (pins, screw6
type locking)
6
3
4
5
5
1
3
7
8
SLG plug connector2 (socket)
1
2
Housing
1 When the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG is used, do not wire
this pin to the ASM.
2 6GT2 091-0A... With angled SLG plug (standard)
6GT2 091-2A... With straight SLG plug (not shown)
Figure 3-59
Connection cable
for ASM 450/452/
473 ↔ SLG
6GT2 091-1CH20
Connection cable: ASM 400/401/424/454, ES 030 ↔ SLG
Two 5-pin round M12 plug connectors
SLG plug connector (socket)
2m
25
X1/2
X1/3
X1/1
X1/4
18,5
X1
X2
X2/3
X2/1
X1/5
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
6
1
4
5
3
2
X2/5
Figure 3-60
3-84
Connection cable: ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Connection cable
for
ASM 410 ↔ SLG
6GT2 091-0D...
or
6GT2 091-2D...
Cable with core sleeves
3 (7)
White
4 (8)
Brown
SLG plug connector2
1 (socket)
5 (9)
Green
4
6 (10)
Yellow
5
2
Gray
3
11
Pink
2
6
(Shield)
1
When the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG is used, do not
wire this pin to the ASM.
2
6GT2 091-0D... With angled SLG plug (standard)
6GT2 091-2D... With straight SLG plug (not shown)
Figure 3-61
!
Connection cable: ASM 410 ↔ SLG
Caution
The cable shield must be secured with a shield clamp directly on the interface module and grounded on a grounding rail.
Connection cable
for ASM 470/475
↔ SLG
6GT2 091-0E...
or
6GT2 091-2E...
Cable with core sleeves
4 (12)
5 (13)
6 (14)
7 (15)
8 (16)
9 (17)
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Pink
Gray
6
SLG plug connector1
1 (socket)
4
5
2
3
(Shield)
Cable shield bared
1
6GT2 091-0E... With angled SLG plug (standard)
6GT2 091-2E... With straight SLG plug (not shown)
Figure 3-62
Connection cable: ASM 470/475 ↔ SLG
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-85
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Connection cable
RS 232
PC ↔ ASM 424
6GT2 391-0B...
ASM side
9-pin, sub D
(pins, screw lock)
2
3
5
TxD
RxD
RxD
TxD
0V
0V
Housing
2
PC side
9-pin, sub D
(socket, screw
lock)
3
5
Housing
l* (5 m/20 m)
*
Made by customer, up to 32 m
Figure 3-63
3-86
Connection cable RS 232 PC ↔ ASM 424
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3.10.4
Cable Lengths
Starting on 10.01.2001 the length key is no longer supported for MOBY cables. Cables are now only offered in certain lengths. See table 3-21.
The cables are based on the following rules.
S Loose cables only in the lengths 50 m, 120 m, and 800 m
S Fabricated cables only in the lengths 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m and 50 m
Customers may make their own cables in all lengths. See table 3-17.
Table 3-21
Ordering data for MOBY cables
SLG stub line, fabricated
Between ASM 400/401/424/454,
ES 030-K and SLG
S SLG plug bent
Length:
5m
10 m
20 m
50 m
6GT2 091-0AH50
6GT2 091-0AN10
6GT2 091-0AN20
6GT2 091-0AN50
Length:
10 m
50 m
6GT2 091-2AN10
6GT2 091-2AN50
Length:
5m
10 m
20 m
6GT2 091-0DH50
6GT2 091-0DN10
6GT2 091-0DN20
Length:
5m
6GT2 091-2DH50
Length:
2m
5m
10 m
20 m
50 m
6GT2 091-0EH20
6GT2 091-0EH50
6GT2 091-0EN10
6GT2 091-0EN20
6GT2 091-0EN50
Length:
2m
5m
10 m
50 m
6GT2 091-2EH20
6GT2 091-2EH50
6GT2 091-2EN10
6GT2 091-2EN50
S SLG plug straight
Between ASM 410 and SLG
S SLG plug bent
S SLG plug straight
Between ASM 470/475 and SLG
S SLG plug bent
S SLG plug straight
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-87
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
Table 3-21
Ordering data for MOBY cables
SLG stub line, fabricated
Between ASM 450/452/473 and SLG
S SLG plug bent
Length:
2 m (standard)
5m
10 m
20 m
50 m
6GT2 091-1CH20
6GT2 091-1CH50
6GT2 091-1CN10
6GT2 091-1CN20
6GT2 091-1CN50
S SLG plug straight
Length:
2m
6GT2 091-2CH20
Stub line, 24 V
Stub line, 2-core for the 24 V DC power supply of the
ASM 400/401. Stub line is equipped with pin cable shoes
on both sides.
Length:
2m
5m
6GT2 091-0CH20
6GT2 091-0CH50
Length:
5m
20 m
6GT2 391-0BH50
6GT2 391-0BN20
RS 232 stub line
Between PC and ASM 424
Cables, without plug connectors
SLG cable, without plug connector between ASM and SLG.
Type: 6 x 0,25 mm2
Length:
3-88
50 m
120 m
800 m
6GT2 090-0AN50
6GT2 090-0AT12
6GT2 090-0AT80
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4
4-1
Mobile Data Memories
4.1
Introduction
Application area
MOBY identification systems ensure that useful data accompany a product
from the very beginning.
Mobile data memories are attached to the product or its conveyor or packaging unit and are written, changed and read - all without contact. All important information related to production and material flow control is located
right on the product.
A sturdy housing permits use in rugged environments and makes the MDS
resistant to many chemical substances.
Layout and
functions
The primary components of the mobile data memories (i.e., MDS) include
logic, antenna, FRAM, and RAM (with battery) or EEPROM.
When an MDS moves into the transmission field of the read/write device (i.e.,
SLG), the power supply unit generates and monitors the necessary power for all
switching elements. The pulse-coded information is conditioned for further
processing as purely digital signals. In addition to managing the various memories, the monitoring unit takes care of data handling and the test routines.
Overview
Table 4-1
Overview table of MDS (replacement parts not included in the table)
Memory Size
MDS Type
MDS 401
MDS 402
MDS 403
MDS 404
MDS 506
MDS 507
MDS 514
MDS 439 E
1
8 (7)1 Kbyte FRAM
Dimensions
(L x W x H in mm)
Protection
Rating
–25 to +85 ° C
Ø 30 x 10
IP67
8
(7)1
Kbyte FRAM
–25 to +70 ° C
47.5 x 25 x 15
IP68
8
(7)1
Kbyte FRAM
–25 to +85 ° C
47.5 x 25 x 15
IP68
8
(7)1
Kbyte FRAM
–25 to +85 ° C
50
x 50 x 20
IP68
–25 to +70 ° C
75
x 75 x 40
IP68
–25 to +70 ° C
125 x 75 x 40
IP65
–25 to +85 ° C
50
IP68
Up to +200 ° C (cyclic)
Ø: 114 x 83
32
(28)1Kbyte
32
(28)1
32
(28)1 Kbyte
8
(7)1
FRAM
Kbyte RAM
FRAM
Kbyte EEPROM
x 50 x 20
IP68
Net capacity during ECC operation
Substitute types
4-2
Temperature Range
(During Operation)
Table 4-1 shows an overview of all current MDS types. See appendix D for a
complete table of all old and new MDSs. This table also specifies substitute
types for components which are no longer available.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
Operational
requirements/
environmental
requirements
Table 4-2
Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS
Proof of mechanical stability is provided by
oscillation test with variable frequency in acc.
w. part 2-6 of DIN IEC 68
Loading in succession in three vertical axes
S
S
S
S
S
Frequency range
10 to 500 Hz
Amplitude
1.5 mm (10 to 58 Hz)
Acceleration
20 g (10 to 500 Hz)
Test duration per axis
20 frequency cycles
Speed of passage
1 octave/min.
Proof of mechanical stability via continuous
shock stress in acc. w. part 2-29 of
DIN IEC 68
S Test conditions
50 g, 6 msec, 500 impacts per axis
Protection rating
IP65/IP68 in acc. w. DIN EN 60529/
VDE 0470-1 1
Ambient temperature
S During operation
S During transportation and storage
–25° to +70° C (+85° C)
Temperature gradient over storage temperature range in acc. w. part 2-4 of DIN IEC 68
Transition from 0° C to 70° C (85° C)
in 10 sec; duration 30 min;
–40° to +70° C (+85° C)
Transition from 70° C (85° C) to 0° C
in 15 sec; duration 30 min; 100 cycles
Cleaning with water jet
1
Max. of 5 min at max. water pressure
of 2 bar
Definition of IP65
– Protection against penetration of dust (i.e., dust-proof)
– Full protection against touch
– Protection against water jet
Definition of IP68
– Protection against penetration of dust (i.e., dust-proof)
– Full protection against touch
– MDS can be continuously submerged in water. Contact manufacturer
for requirements.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4-3
Mobile Data Memories
4.2
MDS 401
Figure 4-1 MDS 401
Ordering data
Table 4-3
Ordering data for MDS 401
6GT2 000-0CA10
Mobile data memory MDS 401
with 8-Kbyte FRAM
Technical data
Table 4-4
Technical data of MDS 401
Memory size
8189-byte FRAM
Memory organization
Random access
MTBF (at 40° C)
1.5 x 106 hours
Battery
None
Read cycles
1010 (at 25° C)
Programming cycles
1010 (at 25° C)
Data retention time
10 years
Read/write intervals
See field data.
Shock
50 g
Vibration
20 g
Torsion and bending stress
Not permitted
Direction dependency
No
Securing of MDS
Screws or glue
Protection rating in accordance with
DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1
IP67
Housing
S Color
S Material
S Chemical resistance
Black
Macromelt (MM)
–
Resistant to
Caustic soda, cutting oil, transmission oil, cooler fluid, petroleum
–
Less resistant to
Toluol, aceton, alcohol
S Dimensions in mm
Approx. Ğ 27 x 9
Ambient temperature
4-4
S During operation
S During transportation and storage
–25° to +85° C
Weight
Approx. 7 g
–40° to +85° C
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
Field data (in mm)
Table 4-5
Field data of MDS 401
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
SLG 41/ SLG 41C
SLG 41-S
Operating distance (Sa)
2 to 8
2 to 6
0 to 6
0 to 6
Limit distance (Sg)
10
8
10
10
S L: Vertical
S 2L: Horizontal
–
–
30
20
–
–
50
40
Diameter of transmission window
d = 18
d=9
–
–
Minimum distance from MDS to
MDS
> 50
> 50
> 80
> 80
Transmission window
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
Dimensions
(in mm)
Dimensional drawing
27±0,2
9+0,5
22±0,2
7+0,5
MOBY I
Antenna side
SIEMENS
MDS 401
Figure 4-2 Dimensions of MDS 401
Mounting on metal
Table 4-6
Decrease in field data with mounting of the MDS 401 on or in metal
Mouting position
Metal
Metal
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
SLG 41
100 %
95 %
60 %
70 %
75 %
Not permitted
4-5
Mobile Data Memories
Mounting methods
Mounting of the MDS 401 from behind
22,4
Spacer
Length 8 mm
2
22,4
Adhesive
Mounting plate
Screws; Tightening
provided by the
torque ≤ 0.8 Nm
customer
Mounting of the MDS 401 from the front in pocket hole
27,4
27,5
Adhesive
7,6
9,7
22,4
Mounting ring or washer
(provided by the customer)
MOBY I
SIEMENS
MDS 401
7,6
Mounting of the MDS 401 from the front with cover (non-metallic)
5
∅27,5
3,5
1,5
∅32,2
Recess for M4 screw
40
4,2
55
45
Material: Plastic, fiber glass reinforced
(torsionally rigid plastic, e.g. ASI glass-fiber reinforced)
O-ring for sealing:
O-ring NBR ∅ 2 mm
Outer diameter 32 mm
Inner diameter
28 mm
Shore hardness 70
Figure 4-3 Ways to mount the MDS 401
4-6
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
Definition of the
field midpoints
Midpoint of MDS 401 transmission window
MOBY I
SIEMENS
MDS 401
5
Distance of field midpoints to
edge of SLG head
5
SLG 41
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
Midpoint of MDS 401
transmission window
Distance of field midpoints to
edge of SLG head
SLG 41-S
5
MOBY I
SIEMENS
MDS 401
5
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
Midpoint of MDS 401
transmission window
Distance of field midpoints to
edge of SLG head
12
SLG 41C
MOBY I
SIEMENS
MDS 401
12
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
Midpoint of MDS 401 transmission window
MOBY I
SIEMENS
MDS 401
MOBY I
View of top of
antenna head
SLG 40
SLG 40
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
Figure 4-4
Field midpoints of MDS 401
Note
The midpoint of the MDS 401 transmission window must be positioned exactly over an SLG field midpoint.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4-7
Mobile Data Memories
4.3
MDS 402
Figure 4-5 MDS 402
Ordering data
Table 4-7
Ordering data for MDS 402
Mobile data memory MDS 402
with 8-Kbyte FRAM
Technical data
Table 4-8
6GT2 000-0CA20
Technical data of MDS 402
Memory size
8189-byte FRAM
Memory organization
Random access
MTBF (at 40° C)
1.5 x 106 hours
Read cycles
1010
Programming cycles
1010
Read/write intervals
See field data.
Shock
50 g
Vibration
20 g
Direction dependency
No
Securing of MDS
2 M3 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
v 0.7 Nm
Protection rating
S In acc. w. DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1
IP 68/IP X9K
(steam jet: 150 mm;
10 - 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75° C)
Housing
S Color
S Material
S Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Gray
Polyamide 12
47.5 x 25 x 15
Ambient temperature
4-8
S During operation
S During transportation and storage
–25° to +70° C
Weight
25 g
–40° to +70° C
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
Field data (in mm)
Table 4-9
Field data of MDS 402
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
SLG 41/
SLG 41-S
SLG 41 C
Operating distance (Sa)
2 to 8
2 to 6
0 to 6
0 to 6
Limit distance (Sg)
10
8
10
10
S L: Vertical
S 2L: Horizontal
–
–
30
20
–
–
50
40
Diameter of transmission window
d = 18
d=9
–
–
Minimum distance from MDS to
MDS
> 50
> 50
> 80
> 80
Transmission window
Dimensions
(in mm)
Dimensional drawing
25
MOBY I
SIEMENS
MDS 402
17,5 1)
12,5
47,5
3,5
13,5
1)
40
4
15
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Metal-free space
a
MDS 402
a
a = 10 mm
Metal-free space with
flush installation
No distance to metal
required on this side
a
It is possible to mount the MDS
directly on metal. This may result in
reductions of the range of up to 20%.
1 Perpendicular intervals of the mounting holes
Figure 4-6
Dimensions of MDS 402
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4-9
Mobile Data Memories
Definition of the
field midpoints
Midpoint of MDS 402 transmission window
MDS 402
Distance of field midpoins to
edge of SLG head
5
5
SLG 41
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
Midpoint of MDS 402
transmission window
Distance of field midpoints to
edge of SLG head
SLG 41-S
5
MDS 402
5
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
Midpoint of MDS 402
transmission window
Distance of field midpoints to
edge of SLG head
12
SLG 41C
MDS 402
12
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
Midpoint of MDS 402 transmission window
MDS 402
MOBY I
View of top of
antenna head
SLG 40
SLG 40
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
Figure 4-7
Field midpoints of MDS 402
Note
The midpoint of the MDS 402 transmission window must be positioned exactly over an SLG field midpoint.
4-10
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
4.4
MDS 403
Figure 4-8 MDS 403
Ordering data
Table 4-10
Ordering data for MDS 403
Mobile data memory MDS 403
with 8-Kbyte FRAM
Technical data
Table 4-11
6GT2 000-1CF00
Technical data of MDS 403
Memory size
8189-byte FRAM
Memory organization
Random access
MTBF (without battery; at 40° C)
1.5 x 106 hours
Battery
No battery
Read cycles
1010 (at 25° C)
Programming cycles
1010 (at 25° C)
Data retention time
10 years
Read/write intervals
See field data.
Shock
50 g
Vibration
20 g
Direction dependency
Yes
S Max. angle deviation
" 45 °
Securing of MDS
2 M3 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
v 0.7 Nm
Protection rating
S In acc. w. DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1
IP 68/IP X9K
(steam jet: 150 mm;
10 - 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75° C)
Housing
S Color
S Material
S Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Gray
Polyamide 12
47.5 x 25 x 15
4-11
Mobile Data Memories
Table 4-11
Technical data of MDS 403
Ambient temperature
Field data (in mm)
S During operation
S During transportation and storage
–25° to +85° C
Weight
25 g
Table 4-12
–40° to +85° C
Field data of MDS 403
SLG 41/
SLG 41-S/
SLG 41C
SLG 42
SIM 4x
Operating distance (Sa)
4 to 15
10 to 30
0 to 25
Limit distance (Sg)
30
80
40
Transmission window (L x W)
65 x 25
110 x 50
80 x 45
Minimum distance from MDS to MDS
> 120
> 200
> 200
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
4-12
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
Dimensions
(in mm)
Dimensional drawing
25
1)
MOBY I
SIEMENS
MDS 403
17.5
47.5
3.5
The arrow shows the direction
of movement and the orientation of the MDS to the SLG.
40 1)
4
15
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
1
Right-angle distance
between the mounting holes
Metal-free space (see chap. 3.5.1)
a
MDS 403
a
a
a
Figure 4-9
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
a w10 mm
Metal-free space with
flush installation
With flush installation in metal the transmission window is reduced by up to
40% (with a = 10 mm). However, the
working distance in table 4-12 can still
be used.
The MDS 403 can be mounted directly
on metal without noticeable reduction of
the field data.
Dimensions of MDS 403
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4-13
Mobile Data Memories
The transmission
window
The transmission window is the basis for the configuration of communication
in dynamic mode.
Use the formula in chap. 3.1 to calculate the max. amount of data which can
be processed in dynamic operation.
MOBY I
MDS403
L x W = 65 x 25 [mm]
Direction of movement of the MDS
L x W = 65 x 25 [mm]
MOBY I
MDS403
MDS 403 and SLG 41
MDS 403 and SLG 41C
Direction of movement of the MDS
L x W = 65 x 25 [mm]
MOBY I
MDS403
MDS 403 and SLG 41-S
MOBY I
MDS403
MOBY I
MDS403
Direction of movement of the MDS
Length (L)
Direction of movement
of the MDS
L x W = 110 x 50 [mm]
L x W = 80 x 45 [mm]
Width (W)
MDS 403 and SLG 42
Figure 4-10
4-14
MDS 403 and SIM
Transmission window of the MDS 403
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
Transmission
window with
auxiliary lobes
Figure 4-11 shows the complete transmission window of the MDS 403 with
the auxiliary lobes. Although auxiliary lobes are always present, they should
only be used in exceptional cases since their read distances are very limited.
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Transmission hole
Figure 4-11
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
Main window
Auxiliary lobes
Transmission window of the MDS 403 with auxiliary lobes
Exact information on the field geometry of the auxiliary lobes is not available since the values vary widely depending on the particular working distance
and application.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4-15
Mobile Data Memories
4.5
MDS 404
Figure 4-12
Ordering data
Table 4-13
MDS 404
Ordering data for MDS 404
Mobile data memory MDS 404
with 8-Kbyte FRAM
including mounting frame
6GT2 000-0EG00
Replacement parts:
Mounting frame
Technical data
Table 4-14
6GT2 090-0CA10
Technical data of MDS 404
Memory size
8189-byte FRAM
Memory organization
Random access
MTBF (without battery; at 40° C)
1.5 x 106 hours
Battery
None
Read cycles
1010
Programming cycles
1010
Read/write intervals
See field data.
Shock
50 g
Vibration
20 g
Direction dependency
No
Securing of MDS
2 M4 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
v 1.2 Nm
Protection rating
S In acc. w. DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1
IP 68/IP X9K
(steam jet: 150 mm;
10 - 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75° C)
Housing
S Color
S Material
S Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
4-16
Gray
Polyamide 12
50 x 50 x 20
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
Table 4-14
Technical data of MDS 404
Ambient temperature
Field data (in mm)
S During operation
S During transportation and storage
–25° to +85° C
Weight
50 g
Table 4-15
–40° to +85° C
Field data of MDS 404
SLG 41/
SLG41-S
SLG 41C SLG 42 SLG 43
SIM 41/42/43
Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 12
0 to 12
0 to 30
0 to 50
0 to 20
Limit distance (Sg)
25
25
60
90
33
S L: Vertical
S 2L: Horizontal
36
30
90
140
60
72
60
180
260
80
Minimum distance
from MDS to MDS
> 90
> 90
> 250
> 500
> 200
Transmission
window
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
Dimensions
(in mm)
MDS
Mounting frame
50
46
50
40
9
+1
19
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Metal-free space
16 9
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
Mounting diagram
a
a
a
a
a = 10 mm
Metal-free space with
flush installation
Figure 4-13
MDS can be mounted as
shown with the mounting
frame.
Dimensions of MDS 404
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4-17
Mobile Data Memories
4.6
MDS 506
Figure 4-14
Ordering data
Table 4-16
MDS 506
Ordering data for MDS 506
Mobile data memory MDS 506
with 32-Kbyte RAM
Technical data
Table 4-17
6GT2 000-0DC00-0AA0
Technical data of MDS 506
Memory size
32765-byte FRAM
Memory organization
Random access
MTBF (at 40° C)
1.5 x 106 hours
Battery
No battery
(starting with E of MDS)
Read cycles
1010
Programming cycles
1010
Read/write intervals
See field data.
Shock
50 g
Vibration
20 g
Direction dependency
No
Securing of MDS
2 M5 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
v 2 Nm
Protection rating in acc. w. DIN EN 60529/
VDE 0470-1
IP68
Housing
S Color
S Material
S Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Gray
Polyamide 12
75 x 75 x 40
Ambient temperature
4-18
S During operation
S During transportation and storage
–25° to +70° C
Weight
200 g
–40° to +70° C
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
Field data (in mm)
Table 4-18
Field data of MDS 506
SLG 42
SLG 43
SIM 41/42/43
Operating distance (Sa)
101 to 35
201 to 100
0 to 25
Limit distance (Sg)
70
150
40
S L: Vertical
S 2L: Horizontal
120
220
85
190
400
100
Minimum distance from MDS to
MDS
> 300
> 600
> 300
Transmission window
1
Underranging the minimum operating distance can cause a transmission gap in the
middle of the field. No communication with the MDS can take place in this transmission gap.
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
∅5
75
Dimensional drawing
65
Dimensions
(in mm)
2.5
65
3.5
75
40
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Metal-free space
h w 20 mm
a
a
a
a
a = 40 mm
Metal-free space
with flush installation
Figure 4-15
Metal
Non-metallic
spacer
MDS can be mounted directly on metal although
this may reduce its range by up to 50%. This reduced range can be avoided by maintaining a distance of h ≥ 20 mm to the metal.
Dimensions of MDS 506
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4-19
Mobile Data Memories
4.7
MDS 507 1
Description
The MDS 507 data memories were designed for read and write-accesses from
great distances. They are equipped with a battery block containing 2 batteries (i.e., the RAM battery and the dialog battery).
The RAM battery is used to buffer the RAM data and to turn on the MDS as
soon as it enters the transmission window of an active SLG.
The dialog battery is used to power the control logic of the MDS. Both batteries are contained in a battery block. This battery block can be replaced via
plug-in contacts. The dialog battery is only activated when the MDS is located in the transmission window of an SLG. Outside the transmission window, the dialog battery is in standby mode, and virtually no discharging takes
place.
When using the MDS 507, make sure that the SLG (presence) is switched off
after the MDS is processed or the MDS leaves the transmission window.
This will ensure long dialog battery life.
The MDS 507 can also be used with an SLG 42 or SLG 43 although its range
is reduced. It can also be used with the STG 4F.
Even with a dead dialog battery, the MDS 507 can still be processed with an
SLG 42/43 or an STG I. This provides the user with information on the
status of the dialog or backup battery.
Physical layout
The MDS 507 consists of a floor plate and the upper housing portion. The
upper housing portion contains the electronics and the batteries. Changing
the batteries is very simple with the plug-in contacts.
Floor plate and upper housing portion are held together with a snap-in catch.
The upper housing portion can be removed by opening the four catches. The
floor plate on the MDS carrier may remain in place (i.e., screwed in) while
the batteries are being changed.
Figure 4-16
1
MDS 507
Only available now as a spare part
4-20
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
Ordering data
Table 4-19
Ordering data for MDS 507
Mobile data memory MDS 507
with 32-Kbyte RAM
Configuring manual
SLG 44/MDS 507
German
English
Accessories (order separately)
Magnet holder for MDS 5071
Replacement battery1
1
Technical data
6GT2 000-0DC01-0AA0
On “Software MOBY” CD
6GT2 090-0PA00
6GT2 094-0AA0
Only available now as a spare part
Table 4-20
Technical data of MDS 507
MDS 507
Memory size
32 Kbytes
Memory type
RAM
Memory organization
Random access
MTBF (without battery; at 40° C)
1.5 x 106 hours
Battery life span
S At 25° C (continuous temperature)
S At 70° C (continuous temperature)
Approx. 10 years
Approx. 6 years
Life span of dialog battery
S 15-min processing time/day
S 5-min processing time/day
S < 1 min processing time/day
Approx. 2 years
Battery for data backup
Yes
Battery for dialog with SLG
Yes
Read cycles
Unlimited
Programming cycles at 70° C (min.)
Unlimited
Programming cycles at 40° C (typical)
Unlimited
Read/write intervals
See field data.
Shock
50 g
Vibration
20 g
Direction dependency
Yes
Maximum angle deviation
"45°
Securing of MDS
4 M5 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
v 2 Nm
Protection rating
IP65
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Approx. 5 years
Approx. 10 years
4-21
Mobile Data Memories
Table 4-20
Technical data of MDS 507
MDS 507
Housing
S Color
S Material
S Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Gray
Polyamide 12
125 x 75 x 40
Ambient temperature
S During operation
S During transportation and storage
–25° to +70° C
Weight
330 g
1
Field data (in mm)
–40° to +70° C
Discontinued
Table 4-21
Field data of MDS 507
SLG 44
Operating distance (Sa)
100 to 800
Limit distance (Sg)
> 1000
Transmission window
S L (at Sa)
S W (at Sa)
1200
Minimum distance from MDS to MDS
> 4000
300
Note
Using the field data specified here, the MDS 507 can be configured without
any special knowledge. However, more complex configurations require the
exact transmission window as described in chapter 3.6.
4-22
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
Dimensions
(in mm)
Dimensional drawing
5.5
125
115
40
65
75
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Metal-free space
a
a
a
a
Magnet holder
a > 40 mm
Metal-free space
with flush installation
Mounting on a nonmetallic spacer can
be omitted.
M5 threaded socket
128
78
15
Figure 4-17
Material:
Polyamide
Foam rubber pad
(2.5 mm)
Dimensions of MDS 507
Mounting screws and washer for the MDS are not included.
The magnet holder can be used in all situations in which the MDS must be
removed very quickly from one object and affixed to another.
Using the foam rubber pad, the MDS magnet holder can be placed directly on
painted iron surfaces.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4-23
Mobile Data Memories
4.8
MDS 514
Figure 4-18
Ordering data
Table 4-22
MDS 514
Ordering data for MDS 514
Mobile data memory MDS 514
with 32-Kbyte FRAM
including mounting frame
6GT2 000-0DG10
Replacement parts:
Mounting frame
Technical data
Table 4-23
6GT2 090-0CA10
Technical data of MDS 514
Memory size
32765-byte FRAM
Memory organization
Random access
MTBF (without battery; at 40° C)
1.5 x 106 hours
Battery
No, starting with D of MDS
Read cycles
1010
Programming cycles
1010
Read/write intervals
See field data.
Shock
50 g
Vibration
20 g
Direction dependency
No
Securing of MDS
2 M4 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
v 1.2 Nm
Protection rating
S In acc. w. DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1
IP 68/IP X9K
(steam jet: 150 mm;
10 - 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75° C)
Housing
S Color
S Material
S Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
4-24
Gray
Polyamide 12
50 x 50 x 20
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
Table 4-23
Technical data of MDS 514
Ambient temperature
Field data (in mm)
S During operation
S During transportation and storage
–25° to +85° C
Weight
50 g
Table 4-24
–40° to +85° C
Field data of MDS 514
SLG 41/ SLG 41C
SLG 41-S
SLG 42
SLG 43
SIM 41/42/43
Operating distance
(Sa)
0 to 12
0 to 12
0 to 30
0 to 50
0 to 20
Limit distance (Sg)
25
25
60
90
33
36
30
90
140
60
72
60
180
260
80
>90
> 250
> 500
> 200
Transmission
window
S L: Vertical
S 2L: Horizontal
Minimum distance > 90
from MDS to MDS
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
Dimensions
(in mm)
MDS
Mounting frame
50
46
50
40
9
19+1
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Metal-free space
16
9
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
Mounting diagram
a
a
a
a
a = 10 mm
Metal-free space with
flush installation
Figure 4-19
MDS can be mounted as
shown with the mounting
frame.
Dimensions of MDS 514
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4-25
Mobile Data Memories
4.9
MDS 439 E
Application area
This heat-proof data memory can be used when processes expose the data
memory to temperatures in excess of 85° C but less than 220° C. Its IP68
protection rating ensures reliable service under rugged operating conditions.
The MDS is dimensioned so that it can be secured both on a skid and directly
on a chassis.
Some typical applications are listed below.
S Priming, KTL area and cataphoretic dip coating with the related drying
chambers
S Surface painting and related drying chambers
S Washing at temperatures > 85° C
S Other applications with higher temperatures
Figure 4-20
Ordering data
Table 4-25
MDS 439 E
Ordering data for MDS 439 E
6GT2 000-0CD30-0AD0
Mobile data memory MDS 439 E
with 8-Kbyte FRAM
Technical data
4-26
Order separately:
Holder
Short version
Covering hood
6GT2 090-0QA00
6GT2 090-0QB00
Description - MDS 439 E
German
English
6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA1
6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA2
Table 4-26
Technical data of MDS 439 E
Memory size
8189-byte FRAM
Memory organization
Random access
MTBF (at 40° C)
2.5 x 106 hours
Battery
No
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
Table 4-26
Technical data of MDS 439 E
Read cycles in acc. w. DIN EN 60529/
VDE 0470-1
Unlimited
Write cycles
S At 70° C (min.)
S At 40° C (typ.)
10000
Read/write intervals
See field data.
Shock1
50 g
Vibration1
5g
Direction dependency
No
Hazardous area approval
No
Protection rating in acc. w. DIN EN 60529/
VDE 0470-1
IP68
109
Housing
S Color
S Material
S Dimensions (∅ x H) in mm
Brown
Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS)
114 x 83
Ambient temperature
S Permanent operation
S Cyclic operation
S Transportation and storage
–25° to +100° C
Weight
900 g
Silicone free
Yes (all materials)
1
Field data (in mm)
–25° to +220° C
–40° to +110° C
Applies only when used with original holder
Table 4-27
Field data of MDS 439 E
SLG 42
SLG 43
SIM
41/42/43
Operating distance (Sa)
101 to 55
201 to 80
0 to 25
Limit distance (Sg)
70
125
33
S L: Vertical
S 2L: Horizontal
120
190
75
210
330
100
Minimum distance from MDS to MDS
> 500
> 600
> 300
Transmission window
1
Underranging the minimum operating distance can cause a transmission gap in the
middle of the field. No communication with the MDS can take place in this transmission gap.
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4-27
Mobile Data Memories
Dimensions
(in mm)
11 + 1
Mounting edge
61 + 1
83 + 3
11+ 1
114 ± 0,5
7
Antenna side
Figure 4-21
Dimensional drawing of MDS 439 E
Short version (6GT2 090-0QA00)
234
140
100
11
96
25
Material: stainless sheet steel (chrome-nickel steel)
with thickness of 2.5 mm
Figure 4-22
Holder of the MDS 439 E data memory
Covering hood, optional
(6GT2 090-0QB00)
27
51.5
Antenna side of
the MDS
Figure 4-23
4-28
Assembly of MDS 439 E with holder
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories
The holder includes all mounting materials and a drawing. Mounting screws
(diameter of M10 and minimum length of 25 mm) to secure the holder are
not included. The mounting screws have a diameter of M10. The minimum
length is 25 mm. The optional covering hood can be used for the long and
short version of the holder.
!
Caution
We strongly recommend only using the MDS with its original holder. Only
this holder can ensure that the MDS adheres to the values specified for
shock, vibration and temperature. A protective cover is recommended for
use in painting applications.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
a
a = 40 mm
S
The MDS holder has
no effect on the
metal-free space.
S
The optional protective cover has no effect on the metal-free
space.
Sectional drawing
No special metal-free
space is required on the
upper half of the MDS (i.e.,
above the holder).
a
Figure 4-24
Metal-free space for MDS 439 E
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4-29
Mobile Data Memories
Cyclic MDS operation at temperatures > 110° C
At ambient temperatures > 110° C, it must be ensured that the interior temperature of the MDS does not exceed the critical threshold of 110° C. Each
heat-up phase must be followed by a cool-down phase. Some limit cycles are
listed in the following table.
Table 4-28
Limit cycles of MDS 439 E
Tu (Heat-Up)
Heating Up
Tu (Cool-Down)
Cooling Down
220° C
0,5 h
25° C
>2h
200° C
1h
25° C
>2h
190° C
1h
25° C
> 1 h 45 min
180° C
2h
25° C
>5h
170° C
2h
25° C
>4h
Calculation of a temperature profile is available from Siemens on request.
Note
For further configuration notes, see chapter 3.7 or the description of
MDS 439 E (6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA2).
4-30
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5
5-1
Read/Write Devices
5.1
Introduction
Application area
The read/write devices (i.e., SLGs) provide inductive communication with
the mobile data memories (i.e., MDSs) and the serial link to the interfaces
(i.e., ASMs).
Various SLG models – for short, medium and long distances to the MDS –
are available to meet customer requirements.
Layout and functions
The SLG executes commands received from the interface. These commands
for reading and writing data are converted via a modulator/demodulator circuit.
Communication between MDS and SLG takes place via inductive alternating
fields.
The amount of data which can be transferred between SLG and MDS depends on the factors listed below.
S The speed at which the MDS moves through the transmission window of
the SLG
S The length of the transmission window
S The type of MDS (i.e., RAM, FRAM, EEPROM)
Overview table
Table 5-1
Overview table of the SLG
Operating
Distance Sa
(Depending on
MDS)
Limit Distance Sg
SLG 40
2 to 8 mm
10 mm
–25 to +70° C
∅ 30 x 54 (head)
IP65
SLG 40-S
2 to 6 mm
8 mm
–25 to +70° C
∅ 18 x 30 (head)
IP65
SLG 41/41-S
0 to 15 mm
25 mm
–25 to +70° C
120 x 40 x 40
IP65
SLG 41C/41CC
0 to 15 mm
25 mm
–25 to +70° C
55 x 75 x 30
IP67
SLG 42
0 to 55 mm
70 mm
–25 to +70° C
75 x 40 x 75
IP65
SLG 43
0 to 100 mm
150 mm
–25 to +70° C
238 x 40 x 80
IP65
SLG 44
100 to 800 mm
1000 mm
–25 to +70° C
238 x 40 x 80
IP63
SLG Type
5-2
Temperature
Range
(During
Operation)
Dimensions
(WxHxD) in mm
Protection
Rating
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
5.2
SLG 40
Application area
The SLG 40 is extremely suited for use on small assembly lines. The short
installation distance between several SLG 40 antennas is a special feature.
With the 2 included screw nuts, the antenna head can be positioned with extreme precision for each application.
Figure 5-1 Read/write device SLG 40
Ordering data
Table 5-2
Ordering data for SLG 40
Read/write device SLG 40
up to 10 mm (low power), incl. screw nuts
Accessories:
SLG plug connector and stub lines
Mounting clamp
Technical data
Table 5-3
6GT2 001-0EA10
See chapter 3.10
3SX6 284
Technical data of SLG 40
Inductive interface to MDS
Data transmission speed
Read/write distance
SLG to MDS (max.)
Transmission frequency
S Power
S Data
Serial interface to ASM
Transmission speed
Line length, ASM to SLG (max.)
at 24 V DC
19200 baud
10 mm (see field data table)
134 kHz
1.81 MHz
6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w.
DIN 43651
19200 baud, RS 422
360 m
Supply voltage
(via serial interface)
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption
Idle/operation
24 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
MTBF
2 x 106
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
25 mA/90 mA
5-3
Read/Write Devices
Table 5-3
Technical data of SLG 40
Housing
Dimensions (in mm)
For antenna head (∅ x threading x L)
For electronics w/o plug (WxHxD)
Color
Antenna
SLG housing
Material
Antenna
SLG housing
Plug connection
M30 x 1.5 x 54
125 x 40 x 75
Anthracite with orange head
Ergo-gray
“Crastin”
Polyamide 12
DIN 43651
Protection rating
Antenna and SLG housing
Shock
Vibration
IP65
50 g
20 g
Mounting of SLG
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
4 M5 screws
v 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25° to +70° C
–40° to +85° C
Weight (approx.)
Certifications
Field data
Applicable for MDS 402/401
Table 5-4
FCC information
215 g
EN 300 330
FCC Part 15
UL/CSA
Field data of SLG 40
Operating distance (Sa)
Limit distance (Sg)
2 to 8 mm
10 mm
Median deviation (Ld)
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D)
18 mm (+ 9 mm from middle)
Da w 50 mm
Db w 80 mm
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 40
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5-4
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
Transmission
window
Ld
Ld
sg
Field at Sa = 2 mm
sa
Field at Sa = 8 mm
View of top
View of side
Figure 5-2
View of the antenna
Transmission window:
To ensure reliable data communication, the antenna of the MDS must be
positioned within this field. A diameter of Ld = 18 mm can be configured for
the operating distance (2 to 8 mm).
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
Metal-free space
a
MOBY I
SLG 40
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
a
a = 10 mm
b = 10 mm
Metal-free space with flush
installation
b
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Note:
The limit and operating distances
are reduced when the metal-free
space is not adhered to.
Figure 5-3
Metal-free space for SLG 40
Optional mounting
clamp
30
18
29
36
58
42,5
30
19,5
Figure 5-4
Mounting diagram and dimensions of SLG 40 with mounting clamp
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-5
Read/Write Devices
Definition of
distance D
Da
Db
Da w 50 mm
Db w 80 mm
The SLG electronics can be mounted directly
next to each other.
Figure 5-5
Distance D for SLG 40
Dimensions
(in mm)
Anti-kink cable protector, flexible
in all directions
Minimum bending
radius: 20 mm
40
5.5
Cable length 0.5 m
Antenna head
MOBY I
Screw nuts
54
M30
115 125
Antenna side
SLG 40
Top view of antenna head
21
MOBY I
65
75
Figure 5-6
5-6
36
SLG 40
Dimensional diagram of SLG 40
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
5.3
SLG 40-S
Application area
The SLG 40 is extremely suited to use in small assembly lines. The short
installation distance between several SLG 40-S antennas is a special feature.
With the 2 included screw nuts, the antenna head can be positioned with extreme precision for each application.
Figure 5-7
Ordering data
Technical data
Table 5-5
Read/write device SLG 40-S
Ordering data for SLG 40-S
Read/write device SLG 40-S
up to 8 mm (low power), incl. screw nuts
6GT2 001-0EB00
SLG plug connector and stub lines
See chapter 3.10
Table 5-6
Technical data of SLG 40-S
Housing
Dimensions (in mm)
For antenna head (∅ x threading x L)
M18 x 1.0 x 30
For electronics w/o plug (L xW x H)
75 x 75 x 40
Color
Antenna
Anthracite with orange head
SLG housing
Ergo-gray
Antenna
“Crastin”
SLG housing
Polyamide 12
Material
Plug connection
DIN 43651
Protection rating
Antenna and SLG housing
IP65
Shock
50 g
Vibration
20 g
Storage temperature
–40° to +85° C
Operation temperature
–25° to +70° C
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-7
Read/Write Devices
Table 5-6
Technical data of SLG 40-S
Operating voltage
Current
consumption
Field data
17 to 30 V DC
Idle
25 mA
Operation
90 mA
Serial interface
Transmission speed
Max. cable length (cf. chap. 3.10.1; standard cable)
RS 422
19200 baud
360 m
MTBF
Transmission frequency
2 x 106
S Power
S Data
134 kHz
Mounting of SLG
4 M5 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
Mounting of SLG head (included)
v 2 Nm
2 nuts (M18 x 1.0)
Weight (approx.)
Certifications
200 g
EN 300 330
FCC Part 15
UL/CSA
1.81 MHz
Applicable for MDS 401/402
Table 5-7
Field data of SLG 40-S
Operating distance (Sa)
2 to 6 mm
Limit distance (Sg)
Diameter of transmission window (Ld)
Median deviation
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D)
8 mm
9 mm
" 4.5 mm from middle
Da w 50 mm
Db w 80 mm
FCC information
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 40S
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5-8
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
Transmission
window
Ld
Ld
sg
Field at Sa = 2 mm
sa
Field at Sa = 8 mm
View of top
View of side
Figure 5-8
View of the antenna
Transmission window:
To ensure reliable data communication, the antenna of the MDS must be
positioned within this field.
Metal-free space
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
a
MOBY I
SLG 40-S
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
a
a = 10 mm
b = 10 mm
b
Metal-free space with flush
installation
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Note:
The limit and operating distances
are reduced when the metal-free
space is not adhered to.
Figure 5-9
Metal-free space for SLG 40-S
Definition of
distance D
Da
Db
Da w 50 mm
Db w 80 mm
The SLG electronics can be mounted directly
next to each other.
Figure 5-10
Distance D for SLG 40-S
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-9
Read/Write Devices
Dimensions
(in mm)
Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions
50
Minimum bending
radius: 20 mm
Cable length 0.5 m
Antenna head
75
Screw nuts
65
30
25
5
M18
Fine threading
Pitch 1.0
5
18
5.5
75
MOBY I
SLG 40-S
Antenna side
24
Top view of antenna head
Figure 5-11
5-10
Dimensional diagram of SLG 40-S
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
5.4
SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Application area
The SLG 41 is a low-end read/write device. It is particularly suitable for use
when the MDS conveyor system (e.g., pallets) can be physically positioned
relatively precisely. The swivel head of the SLG 41 makes it very adaptable
to the transportation system.
In dynamic operation, only a small amount of data can be read or written
between SLG 41 and MDS.
In contrast to the SLG 41, the antenna of the SLG 41-S is rotated by 90° in
the swivel head so that all positions of the transmission window can be implemented.
Ordering data
Technical data
Figure 5-12
SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Table 5-8
Ordering data for SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Read/write device up to 25 mm
SLG 41
SLG 41-S (antenna turned 90°)
6GT2 001-0AA00
6GT2 001-0AA00-0AX0
SLG plug connector and stub lines
See chapter 3.10
Table 5-9
Technical data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Inductive interface to MDS
Data transmission speed
19200 baud
Read/write distance
SLG to MDS (max.)
30 mm (see field data table)
Transmission frequency
S Power
S Data
134 kHz
Serial interface to ASM
6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w.
DIN 43651
Transmission speed
19200 baud, RS 422
Line length, ASM to SLG (max.)
at 24 V DC
360 m
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
1.81 MHz
5-11
Read/Write Devices
Table 5-9
Technical data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Supply voltage (via serial interface)
Nominal value
24 V DC
Permissible range
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Idle/operation
20 mA / 90 mA
MTBF
2 x 106
Housing
Dimensions in mm (W x H x D)
120 x 40 x 40
Color
Anthracite/ergo-gray
Material
Crastin
Plug connection
DIN 43651
Protection rating
IP65
Shock
50 g
Vibration
20 g
Mounting of SLG
4 M5 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
v 3 Nm
Ambient temperature
Field data
During operation
–25° to +70° C
During transportation and storage
–40° to +85° C
Weight (approx.)
210 g
The exact field data are dependent on the type of MDS used.
Table 5-10
FCC information
Field data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Operating distance (Sa)
0 to 15 mm
Limit distance (Sg)
30 mm
Median deviation (L)
Depends on MDS
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D)
> 200 mm
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 41
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5-12
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
Transmission
window
Transmission window at operating distance
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
M
SLG 41-S
M
M
Transmission window at operating
distance
Length of transmission window
(L)
Figure 5-13
Metal-free space
SIEMENS
Length of
transmission
window (L)
SIEMENS
M
Transmission window of SLG 41/SLG 41-S
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
a
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
a
Figure 5-14
a
a
a = 25 mm
Metal-free space
with flush installation
a = 25 mm
Metal-free
space with flush
installation
Metal-free space for SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Definition of
distance D
SLG 41 / SLG 41-S
D
SLG 41
D
SLG 41
Figure 5-15
Distance D for SLG 41/SLG 41-S
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-13
Read/Write Devices
Dimensions
(in mm)
SLG 41:
40
28
40
80
SIEMENS
40
25
60
5.3
49
14.5
40
Position of
swivel head
on delivery
30
SLG 41-S:
40
28
40
80
SIEMENS
5.3
40
Figure 5-16
Possible read head
changes with the
swivel head
25
49
14.5
60
40
Position of
swivel head
on delivery
30
Dimensional diagram of SLG 41/SLG 41-S
SIEMENS
SLG 41
SIEMENS
SLG 41-S
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
Figure 5-17
5-14
Read head changes of SLG 41/SLG 41-S
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
5.5
SLG 41C/SLG 41CC
Application area
The SLG 41C is a low-end read/write device. It is small and compact and is
excellent for use in small assembly lines.
The high protection rating and use of high-quality materials ensure that the
SLG 41C can easily handle even most rugged industrial conditions.
It is connected with a 3-m cable which is equipped with core sleeves at the
end. This connection line can be extended with terminals or a user-provided
connection plug. This connection plug of the ASM is used for the connection
to the ASM.
The cable length of the SLG 41CC is 2 m. The end of the cable is equipped
with a twin M-12 plug. This can be used to connect the SLG 41CC directly to
an ASM 450/452/473.
Figure 5-18
Ordering data
Table 5-11
SLG 41C/41CC read/write device
Ordering data of SLG 41C/41CC
Read/write device SLG 41C
6GT2 001-0AC00
SLG 41CC read/write device with
twin M-12 plug
6GT2 001-0AC00-0AX0
Accessories:
Extension cable (not fabricated)
Connection plug for ASM 450/473
Technical data
Table 5-12
6GT2 090-0A...
6GT2 090-0BC00
Technical data of SLG 41C/41CC
Inductive interface to MDS
Read/write distance, SLG-MDS, max.
Transmission frequency
Power
Data
Serial interface to evaluation unit
Data transmission rate
Line length, ASM-SLG max. (for 24V DC)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
30 mm (see field data)
134 kHz
1.81MHz
RS 422
19 200 Baud
360 m
5-15
Read/Write Devices
Table 5-12
Technical data of SLG 41C/41CC
Serial interface to user
SLG 41C
3 m connection line;
open end
2 m connection line;
twin M-12 plug for
ASM 450/452/473
SLG 41CC
Voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption at room temerature
Standby
Operation
Housing
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Color
Material
Connection
5-16
24 V DC
20 V to 30 V DC
30 mA
70 mA (typical)
55 x 75 x 30
Gray
Plastic (polyamide 12)
3 m connection line, cable ends
with core sleeves and labels
Protection rating an acc. w. EN 60 529
Shock
Vibration
IP67
50 g
20 g
Mounting of SLG
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
4 M 5 screws
< 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transpostation and storage
–25° C to +70° C
–40° C to +85° C
Weight approx.
210 g
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
Field data (in mm)
Table 5-13
Field data of SLG 41C/41CC
MDS 401/402
FCC Information
MDS 403
MDS 404/514
Working distance (Sa)
0 to 6
4 to 15
0 to 12
Limit distance (Sg)
10
30
25
Transmission window
S L: Vertical
S 2L: Horizontal
20
40
65
–
30
60
Width of transmission window (W)
8
25
12
Minimum distance from
SLG to SLG
w200
w200
w200
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 41C/41CC
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment.
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-17
Read/Write Devices
Transmission
window
12
M
Transmission window
at working distance
M
12
20
Length of the transmission window (L)
for MDS 401/402
M
5
5
M
30
Length of the transmission window for (L)
MDS 404/514
L = 65
Length of the
transmission window
SIEMENS
Transmission window
at working distance
B = 25
Width of the
transmission window
M
Lenght of the transmisison window for
MDS 403
Figure 5-19
5-18
The transmission window
is marked on the housing
The MDS moves along the
“SIEMENS” label on the
housing.
Transmission window of SLG 41C/41CC
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
Metal-free space
a
SIEMENS
MOBY I
SLG 41C
a
a
a
a = 15 mm
Metal-free area with flush installation
Figure 5-20
Metal-free area of SLG 41C/41CC
Definition of
distance D
SIEMENS
MOBY I
SLG 41C
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG
D = ≥ 200 mm
D
D
SIEMENS
MOBY I
SLG 41C
Figure 5-21
SIEMENS
MOBY I
SLG 41C
Distance D: SLG 41C/41CC
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-19
Read/Write Devices
Dimensions
(in mm)
4
3
30
55
75
Core color
Designation
65
Brown
– Receiving
Pink
+ 24 V
SIEMENS
MOBY I
SLG 41C
45
55
5
5
Gray
Ground (0V)
Green
+ Sending
Yellow
– Sending
White
+ Receiving
Black
Cable shield
w30
∅5
Core and sleeves
Flexible cable
anti-kink guard
0,1 m
3m
75
65
SIEMENS
MOBY I
SLG 41CC
45
55
5
5
∅5
w30
2m
Figure 5-22
5-20
Dimensions of SLG 41C/41CC
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
5.6
SLG 42
Application area
The SLG 42 is a middle-of-the-line read/write device. With its larger antenna, the SLG 42 generates a much larger field than the SLG 41, and a
greater range can be achieved with the same data memories. In dynamic operation, larger amounts of data can be read from and written to the MDS.
See chapter 3.4.
Figure 5-23
Ordering data
Technical data
SLG 42 read/write device
Table 5-14
Ordering data for SLG 42
Read/write device SLG 42
up to 70 mm (medium power)
6GT2 001-0BA00
SLG plug connector and stub lines
See chapter 3.10
Table 5-15
Technical data of SLG 42
Inductive interface to MDS
Data transmission speed
19200 baud
Read/write distance
SLG to MDS (max.)
70 mm (see field data table)
Transmission frequency
S Power
S Data
134 kHz
Serial interface to ASM
6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w.
DIN 43651
Transmission speed
19200 baud, RS 422
Line length, ASM to SLG (max.)
at 24 V DC
120 m
1.81 MHz
Supply voltage (via serial interface)
Nominal value
24 V DC
Permissible range
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Idle/operation
60 mA/180 mA
MTBF
2 x 106
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-21
Read/Write Devices
Table 5-15
Technical data of SLG 42
Housing
Dimensions in mm (W x H x D)
75 x 40 x 75
Color
Gray
Material
Polyamide 12
Plug connection
DIN 43651
Protection rating
IP65
Shock
50 g
Vibration
20 g
Mounting of SLG
2 M5 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
v 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
Field data
During operation
–25° to +70° C
During transportation and storage
–40° to +85° C
Weight (approx.)
250 g
Silicone free
Yes
The exact field data depend on the type of MDS used.
Table 5-16
FCC information
Field data of SLG 42
Operating distance (Sa)
0 to 55 mm
Limit distance (Sg)
70 mm
Median deviation (L)
Depends on MDS
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D)
> 800 mm
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 42
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5-22
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
Transmission
window
Length of
transmission
window (L)
Figure 5-24
Metal-free space
ÏÏÏÏ
Î
ÏÏÏÏ
Î
ÏÏÏÏ
Î
ÏÏÏÏ
Î
ÏÏÏÏ
ÎÏÏÏÏ
Î
M
Transmission window
at operating distance
M
Transmission window of SLG 42
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
a
a = 30 mm
Metal-free space with
flush installation
a
a
a
Figure 5-25
Metal-free space for SLG 42
Definition of
distance D
D
SLG 42
SLG 42
D
SLG 42
Figure 5-26
Distance D: SLG 42
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-23
Read/Write Devices
3.5
2.5
40
Dimensions
(in mm)
75
25
5
65
75
5
49
∅5
Figure 5-27
5-24
Dimensional diagram of SLG 42
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
5.7
SLG 43
Application area
The SLG 43 is a high-performance read/write device. This SLG is particularly suitable for use with large MDS types (i.e., MDS 506/MDS 439 E). The
size of its transmission window is one of its primary features. The physical
tolerances of conveyor systems can be well compensated for with this transmission window. In dynamic operation, the large transmission window permits large amounts of data to be read from or written to the MDS. See chapter 3.4.
Figure 5-28
Ordering data
Technical data
Read/write device SLG 43
Table 5-17
Ordering data for SLG 43
Read/write device SLG 43
up to 150 mm (high power)
6GT2 001-0CA10
SLG plug connector and stub lines
See chapter 3.10
Table 5-18
Technical data of SLG 43
Inductive interface to MDS
Data transmission speed
Read/write distance
SLG to MDS (max.)
Transmission frequency
S Power
S Data
Serial interface to ASM
Transmission speed
Line length, ASM to SLG (max.)
at 24 V DC
19200 baud
150 mm (see field data table)
134 kHz
1.81 MHz
6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w.
DIN 43651
19200 baud, RS 422
85 m
Supply voltage (via serial interface)
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption
24 V DC
21 to 30 V DC
Idle/operation
60 mA/250 mA
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-25
Read/Write Devices
Table 5-18
Field data
MTBF
2 x 106
Housing
Dimensions in mm (W x H x D)
Color
238 x 40 x 80
Gray
Material
Plug connection
Protection rating
Shock
Polyamide 12
DIN 43651
IP65
50 g
Vibration
Mounting of SLG
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
20 g
4 M5 screws
v 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25° to +70° C
–40° to +85° C
Weight (approx.)
Silicone free
800 g
Yes
The exact field data depend on the type of MDS used.
Table 5-19
FCC information
Technical data of SLG 43
Field data of SLG 43
Operating distance (Sa)
0 to 100 mm
Limit distance (Sg)
Median deviation (L)
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D)
150 mm
Depends on MDS
> 2000 mm
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 43
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5-26
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
Transmission
window
Transmission window at
operating distance
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Length of
transmission window
(L)
M
Figure 5-29
Metal-free space
M
Transmission window of SLG 43
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
a
b
a
b
a > 50 mm
b > 30 mm
Metal-free space with
flush installation
h w 20 mm
Non-metallic
spacer
Metal
Although the SLG can be mounted directly on metal, the range may be reduced
by up to 30%.
This can be avoided by maintaining a distance of H > 20 mm to the metal.
Figure 5-30
Metal-free space for SLG 43
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-27
Read/Write Devices
Definition of
distance D
D
SLG 43
SLG 43
D
SLG 43
Figure 5-31
Distance D: SLG 43
Dimensions
(in mm)
5.5
212
225
30
238
25
49
13
40
Figure 5-32
5-28
60
80
5
Dimensional diagram of SLG 43
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
5.8
SLG 44 1
Application area
The SLG 44 permits the MDS 507 data memory to be processed reliably
from a great distance.
This combination of SLG/MDS is particularly suitable for use in systems in
which positioning to the MDS cannot be performed precisely at all or a long
distance between SLG and MDS is required for safety reasons.
The large transmission window between SLG and MDS opens up further application areas. In dynamic operation, large amounts of data can be transferred since the MDS remains in the transmission window for a long period
of time.
In addition, MDS 507 can still be processed with SLG 44 even at top speeds
of 120 km/h.
Figure 5-33
Ordering data
Table 5-20
Read/write device SLG 44
Ordering data for SLG 44
Read/write device SLG 44
up to 1000 mm (long range)
Configuration manual
SLG 44/MDS 507
German
English
SLG plug connector and stub lines
1
6GT2 001-0DA10-0AX0
On “Software MOBY” CD
See chapter 3.10
Only available now as spare part
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-29
Read/Write Devices
Technical data
Table 5-21
Technical data of SLG 44
Inductive interface to MDS
Data transmission speed
19200 baud
Read/write distance
SLG to MDS (max.)
1000 mm (see field data table)
Transmission frequency
S Power
S Data
No power
Serial interface to ASM
6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w.
DIN 43651
Transmission speed
19200 baud, RS 422
Line length, ASM to SLG (max.)
at 24 V DC
270 m
1.81 MHz
Supply voltage (via serial interface)
Nominal value
24 V DC
Permissible range
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Idle/operation
70 mA/110 mA
MTBF
2 x 106
Housing
Dimensions in mm (W x H x D)
238 x 40 x 80
Color
Gray
Material
Polyamide 12
Plug connection
DIN 43651
Protection rating
IP63
Shock
50 g
Vibration
20 g
Mounting of SLG
4 M5 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
v 3 Nm
Ambient temperature
5-30
During operation
–25° to +70° C
During transportation and storage
–40° to +85° C
Weight (approx.)
770 g
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
Field data
The exact field data depend on the type of MDS used.
Table 5-22
Field data of SLG 44
SLG 44
MDS 507 with
Operating distance (Sa)
100 to 800
Limit distance (Sg)
v 1000
Transmission window L
1200
Transmission window B (at Sa)
300
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D)
> 6000
Interference-prone environments (e.g., frequency converters) may reduce the
sensitivity of the SLG and thus affect the field data. See chapter 3.6.5.
The field data are valid for a supply voltage of 24 V DC and a temperature
range of 0° to 50° C.
The field data may be reduced when temperatures are higher or lower.
Transmission
window
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Direction of movement
of MDS
Width of
transmission
window (B)
Identification of field
midpoint on SLG
MOBY I
Polarization direction
MDS 507
SLG 44
SLG 44
Length of transmission window (L)
Caution:
Watch polarization direction.
See also chap. 3.6.
Figure 5-34
Transmission window of SLG 44
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-31
Read/Write Devices
Metal-free space
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
a
b
MOBY I
Polarization direction
SLG 44
a
a > 80 mm
b > 40 mm
Metal-free space with
flush installation
b
h w 20 mm
Non-metallic
spacer
Metal
To reduce interference caused by the metal construction of the system, we recommend
placing the SLG 44 on a non-metallic spacer with a height of at least 20 mm. Mounting
on metal does not noticeably reduce the limit distance of the SLGs.
Figure 5-35
Metal-free space of SLG 44
Definition of
distance D
MOBY I
Polarization direction
SLG 44
D
MOBY I
Polarization direction
SLG 44
SLG 44
SLG 44
D
MOBY I
5-32
Polarization direction
Figure 5-36
SLG 44
SLG 44
Distance D: SLG 44
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
Dimensions
(in mm)
5,5
MOBY I
40±5
Polarization direction
30
Identification of field
midpoint or polarization
direction
225
18
25
238
Potentiometer to set sensitivity
of the SLG (see chap. 3.6.5)
SLG 44
13
40
10
5
60
80
LEDs for
operation indicator
Figure 5-37
LEDs for operation
indicator
All dimensions in mm
Dimensional diagram of SLG 44
Yellow:
Interference on SLG or MDS in boundary area.
The LED also goes on briefly when the SLG performs a power startup.
Green:
MDS is in the field. The LED flashes in accordance with the parameterized
time tABTAST.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-33
Read/Write Devices
5-34
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6
6-1
Interfaces
6.1
Introduction
Application area
ASM interfaces provide the link between MOBY I components (i.e., SLGs
and MDSs) and higher level controllers (e.g., SIMATIC S5/S7), PCs or computers. Up to four SLGs can be connected depending on the interface used.
Layout and functions
An ASM consists of a microcontroller system with its own program stored on
a PROM. The CPU receives commands via the user interface and stores
these in the RAM. The user receives an acknowledgment that the command
has arrived. When the command is correct, the CPU begins execution.
6-2
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Overview
Table 6-1
ASM
Type
Overview of the interfaces
Interfaces to
PC/Computer
Interfaces to
SLG
Function
blocks
SLG
Connections
Dimensions
(WxHxD in
mm)
Temperature
Range
(During
operation)
Protection
Rating
0 to+55 °C
IP00
ASM
400/401
Can be instal- 9-pin sub D
led S5-115 to socket
155U
FB 250/252
FB 230
1 per CM
4 per
ASM
ASM 410
Can be
installed in
S5-100U/
ET 200U
Can be connected via
bus module
opt.: FB 41
for ASM 410
2 (multiplex)
45 x 135 x 100
0 to+60 °C
IP20
ASM 424
RS 232
RS 422
9-pin sub D
socket
MOBY-API
4
(parallel)
205 x 130 x 60
–25 to +55° C
IP40
ASM 450
PROFIBUS
DP
2 5-pin
proximity
switch plug
connectors
FB 240
FC 44
2 (multiplex)
134 x 110 x 55
0 to +55° C
IP67
ASM 452
PROFIBUS
DPV1
2 5-pin
proximity
switch plug
connectors
FC 45
FB 246
FC 46,
FC 56
2 (pseudo
parallel)
134 x 110 x 55
0 to +55° C
IP67
ASM 454
PROFIBUS
DPV1
9-pin sub D
socket
FC 45
4
(parallel)
205 x 130 x 60
–25 to +55° C
IP40
ASM 456
PROFIBUS
DP/DPV1
8-pin
proximity
switch plug
connector
FC 45
2
(parallel)
60 x 210 x 30
0 to +55° C
IP67
ASM 470
Can be
installed in
S7-300/
ET 200M
Via screw
terminals
FC 47
FB 47
2 (multiplex)
40 x 125 x 120
0 to +60° C
IP20
ASM 473
Can be instal- 2 5-pin
led in
proximity
ET 200X
switch plug
connectors
FC 45
FC 56
1
87 x 110 x 55
0 to +55° C
IP67
ASM 475
Can be instal- via screw
led in
terminals
S7-300/
ET 200M
FC 45
FC 56
2
(parallel)
40 x 125 x 120
0 to +60° C
IP20
RF170C
Can be
installed in
ET 200pro
2 M12 plug
connectors
FC 45
FC 55
FC 56
2
(parallel)
90 x 130 x 60
–25 to +55° C
IP67
SIM
V.24,
RS 422,
TTY
(Integrated)
3964R
Driver
75 x 75 x 40
0 to +60° C
IP54
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-3
Interfaces
6.2
ASM 400/401
6.2.1
Overview
Application area
ASM 400/401 interfaces can be directly installed and operated in the following SIMATIC S5 programmable controllers.
S S5-155U/F (all CPUs)
S S5-135U (all CPUs)
S S5-155U/H (all CPUs)
Layout and
function
ASM 400/401 interfaces consist of the basic module in double Europe format
and the CM 422 or CM 423 channel submodule. The basic module can be
equipped with one to four channel submodules. Mixed configuration is not
permitted.
ASM 400
The ASM 400 with the CM 422 operates in the I/O area of the SIMATIC S5.
When used with function block FB 250, up to 32 channel submodules (i.e.,
eight 4-channel interfaces) can be operated in one SIMATIC. When FB 252
is used, the maximum number of channel submodules is increased from 32 to
96 per SIMATIC S5. All MDS models can be processed via the FBs. The
user addresses the data on the MDS via a command table in the data block.
The user addresses user data via absolute addresses.
Using the “dialog” function, two ASMs can exchange data via the SLG.
ASM 401
The ASM 401 with the CM 423 operates in the page-frame area of the
SIMATIC S5. If appropriately configured, the ASM 401 can be used as a
communications processor. The ASM 401 uses function block FB 230. Up
to 255 submodules (i.e., 1020 channel submodules) can be addressed on one
SIMATIC S5.
The data on the MDS are addressed by files with logical names (i.e.,
filehandler).
6-4
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
STG 4F
ASM 400/401*
with channel submodule CM 422/CM 423*
SLG
SLG
MDS
MDS
Figure 6-1
Communication
between ASM 400
and user program
SLG
MDS
SLG
MDS
* With filehandler
Configurator of ASM 400/401
Communication time between ASM 400 and user depends on two factors.
S Cycle time and type of programmable controller
S Software used (i.e., FB 230 and FB 250)
Communication between ASM 400 and user can be divided into three steps.
S The user issues a command and starts it. The next time the FB is called,
the command is transferred to the ASM and acknowledged by the ASM.
S The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user or the FBs are
in wait status. Data communication with the MDS begins as soon as an
MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG. The MDS data are
stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness.
S ASM communication with the MDS is concluded. When the FB is called
the next time, the data which have been read or written are transferred
from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finished message.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-5
Interfaces
Ordering data
Table 6-2
Ordering data for ASM 400/401
Interfaces ASM 400/401
consisting of basic module
and channel module CM 422/CM 423
Basic module
with connection to STG 4F, with 4
insertion slots for channel module
CM 422/CM 423, without channel
module, mixed configuration
not permitted
6GT2 002-0AA00
Channel module CM 422
6GT2 002-0AB00
Channel module CM 423
6GT2 002-1AB00
MOBY software1
with FB 230/250
6GT2 080-2AA10
ASM-SLG stub lines
(see also chap. 3.10)
6GT2 091-0A...
Accessories:
Plug connector, ASM side
9-pin submin D plug connector
with screw lock for
customer cable making
S 1 each
S 10 each
6GT2 090-0BB10
Description-ASM 400/401
German
English
electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Description-FB 230 for ASM 401
German
English
electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Description-FB 250 for ASM 400
German
English
electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
1
6-6
6GT2 090-0BB00
See chap. 7.1.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Technical data
Table 6-3
Technical data of ASM 400/401
Channel Submodule
CM 422
CM 423
Serial interface to SLG
RS 422
Plug connector
9-pin sub D socket
Max. interface/line length
RS 422/1000 m, depending on SLG type
No. of SLGs
1 SLG per CM
Software functions
Programming
With STEP5 function block
FB 250
FB 230
Read data, write data,
initialize MDS
Create file, read, write,
delete, format MDS etc.
Access directly via
addresses
Access via filehandler
(similar to DOS)
Dialog operation
Yes
No
Supply voltage
5/24 V DC via internal bus
Interfaces
ASM 400/401
Commands
Interfaces for CM/SLG
ASM 400 (max.)
2 CM 422s
ASM 401 (max.)
4 CM 423s
(mixed configuration not permitted)
Interface to STG 4F
RS 422, 9-pin sub D socket
Interface for 24 V DC
2-pin plug connector (included)
Supply voltage
Nominal value
5/24 V DC
Permissible range
Internal (at 5 V)
4.75 to 5.25 V DC
External (at 24 V)
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption (max.)
Internal (at 5 V)
1 channel
2 channels
3 channels
4 channels
370
490
610
730
mA
mA
mA
mA
External (at 24 V)
1 channel
2 channels
3 channels
4 channels
400
800
1200
1600
mA
mA
mA
mA
Fine-wire fuse
M 1.25 A/250 V
Ambient temperature
0° to +55° C
During operation
During transportation and storage –20° to +70° C
< 95%
Rel. humidity at 25° C
Space requirements
1 SEP (1 SEP = 15.24 mm)
Weight (approx.)
ASM 400/401
0.44 kg
CM 422/CM 423
0.1 kg
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-7
Interfaces
Function block
FB 250
Function block FB 250 controls data transmission between the STEP5 program and the ASM 400 interface module.
FB 250 can be used on the following “programmable controllers.”
S 115U/F-CPU 941/942/943/944/945
S 135U-R/S-CPU 928/928B
S 155U/H-CPU 948
FB 250 does not use system commands. All MDSs can be processed with
FB 250.
Primary functions of FB 250
S Convert data from user parameterization structure to structure of an ASM
S All communication with the ASM via command and data exchange
S Preparation of errors for the user error handling: Command repetition
Chaining of several partial commands into one complete command
S Reading and writing with a user command
S Any address areas of a mobile data memory can be processed with one
command.
S Control of PLC cycle load via the user
Data transmission between FB and MDS can be divided into three phases.
S Supply interface with the appropriate command and the data or parameters
S Transmit the data between ASM 400 and MDS
S Supply S5 with appropriate parameters or data from the interface
If the P address area is not available, FB 252 also supports operation of the
ASM 400 in the expanded Q address area.
6-8
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Function block
FB 230 for
ASM 401
By using the filehandler management system, the ASM 401 interface module
simplifies data management of the mobile data memory for users of MOBY I
identification systems. The filehandler appears to the user as an MDS operating system. It offers the following advantages (similar to the DOS filehandler management system).
S The user addresses user data via logical names (i.e., file names) which
can consist of up to 8 alpha-numerical characters. This eliminates absolute addressing of the data.
S Related data are called files.
S Management of differing file lengths
S Specification of access rights to files
S Create/delete/read/write (etc.) files
A function block (i.e., FB 230) has been created so that the SIMATIC user
can take advantage of the filehandler.
Since this function block uses system commands, the following function
blocks have been created for the PLCs listed below.
S FB 230/234 for PLC 115U
S FB 231 for PLC 135U
S FB 232 for PLC 155U
S FB 235 for PLC 155U
(QUEUE-read command added)
When the filehandler is used, the amount of user data on the MDS is reduced.
The filehandler stores various management data on the MDS (e.g., system
area, directory, and file allocation table). The following table shows how
much user data is still available to the user.
Table 6-4
Storage capacity of the mobile data memories when the filehandler is
used
Operating Mode
MDS Type
Max. Number of
Files
User Data
62-byte RAM
01
02
81
Without ECC
Without ECC
With
ECC
1
2
1
27
12
7
128-byte
EEPROM
03
83
Without ECC
With
ECC
3
3
60
45
2-Kbyte RAM
04
84
Without ECC
With
ECC
16
16
1680
1440
8-Kbyte
EEPROM
05
85
Without ECC
With
ECC
32
32
7456
6464
32-Kbyte RAM
06
86
Without ECC
With
ECC
64
64
31488
27520
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-9
Interfaces
6.2.2
Hardware Description
Plug connectors
and their assignment
Metal front plate
Connection plug for the STG 4F service
and test device
Attention: STG I (see chap. 7.3) cannot
be connected here.
3 LEDs per channel:
Red LED
Yellow LED
Green LED
Channel
module
no. 1
Channel
module
no. 2
9-pin sub D socket
Plug Connector Assignment to SLG or STG 4F
Screw for connection of channel module to basic module for
EMC operation
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Hous.
Designation
Not used
+ Sending
+ Receiving
Not used
– Receiving
– Sending
Ground (0 V)
+24 V
Not used
Cable shield
Channel
module
no. 3
Connection plug for SLG
9-pin sub D plug connector
with screw-type lock,
order no. 6GT2 090-0BB00
Channel
module
no. 4
+ 24 Volt
GND
Figure 6-2
6-10
24 Volt plug connector
(This plug connector is
included with the ASM.)
Plug connectors and their assignment for ASM 400/401
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Switches and
plug-in jumpers
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Switch 4
1
2
OFF = 0 ON = 1
X20
OFF = 0
ON = 1
8
1 4 1
8
x
Switch 1
Address
settings
x
Switch 2
Switch 3
Figure 6-3
1 and 2 must
always be
jumpered on
X20.
1
Plug connector for
SIMATIC bus
Switches and plug-in jumpers for ASM 400/401
S4 = Setting of the type of addressing
S2 = Setting of the page frame number
S3 = Setting of the module address (linear addressing with PESP)
S1 = Address setting when PESP is not used
Table 6-5
Page
Frame
KH
KY
00
0
01
02
Use of page frame addressing for FB 230
S4
S3
S2
S1
S1
4 3 2 1
1 2
4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5
OFF ON
Not used
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
2
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1
03
3
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1
04
4
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
1 1 1 1
05
5
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
1 1 1 1
06
6
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1
1 1 1 1
07
7
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
08
8
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
.
.
.
.
FD
253
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 1 1
FE
254
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
1 1 1 1
FF
255
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
. . .
. . .
Not
used
. . .
. . .
6-11
Interfaces
Table 6-6
Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252
ASM 400/401 Switch Setting
Start
Address
of ASM
6-12
Switch
S3
4321
Switch
S4
21
FB 250 Parameterization
ADR
FB 252 Parameterization
KAN*
QADR
KAN
0
0000
01
0
1-4
16
0001
16
32
0010
48
0011
64
0100
(Corresponds
to chan
channel
module
1 to 4)
80
0101
96
0110
112
0111
128
1000
144
1001
160
1010
176
1011
192
1100
(
(This
setting
tti
of switch
4 must
Not
always
l
available
be used
when the
module
is operated in
standard
128
1-4
mode.)
(Cor144
responds
160
to chan
channel
176
module
192
1 to 4)
208
1101
208
208
224
1110
224
224
240
1111
240
240
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Settings on the
channel module
Hybrid for
serial interface
CM422 for ASM 400
Plug-in jumper X20
X21 not jumpered
CPU
80C32
Hybrid for
CM423 for ASM 401
serial interface
Plug-in jumper X20
X21 jumpered
CPU
80C32
EPROM
EPROM
Plug-in jumper X20:
S Removed:
Normal operation
S Inserted:
Test operation; dialog to the mobile data memory is aborted earlier when malfunctions
occur. This helps to pinpoint weak spots and malfunctions during commissioning.
Figure 6-4
Settings on the channel module
Note
The CM 422 cannot be upgraded to CM 423 or vice versa. In addition to
jumper X21, several hardware changes must be made.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-13
Interfaces
6.2.3
SIMATIC S5 Configuration
Module rack
CR 700-0LA
(S5-115U)
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
MODY interface module ASM 4011
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-5
CR 700-0LA module rack (S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-0LB
(S5-115U)
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
MODY interface module ASM 4011
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-6
CR 700-0LB module rack (S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-1 (S5-115U)
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
MODY interface module ASM 4011
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-7
6-14
CR 700-1 module rack (S5-115U)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Module rack
CR 700-2 (S5-115U)
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
MODY interface module ASM 4011
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-8
CR 700-2 module rack (S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-3 (S5-115U)
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
MODY interface module ASM 4011
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-9
Module rack
ER 700-0,
ER 701-1 and
ER 701-2
CR 700-3 module rack (S5-115U)
MOBY interface modules ASM 400 and ASM 401 cannot be used.
Module rack
ER 701-3
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
MODY interface module ASM 4011
ASM 314, AS 310, IM 317
IM 307 or IM 317
(only starting with ER 701-3LA13)
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each
ASM 400/401 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-10
ER 701-3 module rack (S5-115U)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-15
Interfaces
Central controller
S5-135U/155U
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
MODY interface module ASM 401
Figure 6-11
S5-135U/155U central controller
Central controller
S5-155U/155H
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
MODY interface module ASM 401
Figure 6-12
S5-155U/155H central controller
Expansion device
S5-183U
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
MODY interface module ASM 401
Interface 312-3
Interface 310 or 314
Figure 6-13
6-16
S5-183U expansion device for S5-135U/155U
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Expansion device
S5-184U
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
MODY interface module ASM 401
Interface 312-5
Figure 6-14
S5-184U expansion device for S5-135U/155U
Expansion device
S5-185U
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
MODY interface module ASM 401
Interface 314
Figure 6-15
S5-185U expansion device for S5-135U/155U/155H
Expansion device
S5-187U
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
MODY interface module ASM 401
Interface 312-5
Figure 6-16
S5-187U expansion device for S5-135U/155U
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-17
Interfaces
6.3
ASM 410
Application area
Interface ASM 410 can be used in the SIMATICs listed below.
S S5-90U (max. of 2)
S S5-95U (max. of 4)
S S5-100U (max. of 8)
S ET 100U (max. of 2)
S ET 200U (max. of 4)
Since the ASM can be used with all mobile data memories, read/write devices and the STG 4F service test device, compatibility with all MOBY I
components is ensured.
Layout and
function
LEDs for status and error indications are located on the front. Interferenceimmune design is provided by the galvanic isolation of the MOBY I interface
to the SIMATIC S5 bus. The MOBY commands are started and data are
fetched by setting and scanning a few control bits in the process image (PIO/
PII), and eight input/output bytes are assigned. In time-multiplex operation,
one or two SLGs can be used. The MDS data are accessed via their absolute
addresses.
Bus module of
PLC S5-100U
with ASM 410
STG 4F
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
SLG
SLG
MDS
Figure 6-17
6-18
MDS
Configurator for the ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Ordering data
Table 6-7
Ordering data for ASM 410
Interface ASM 410
6GT2 002-0BA00
SIMATIC S5, bus module for 2 ASMs with
Screw connection
Crimp connection, with crimp contacts
6ES5 700-8MA11
6ES5 700-8MA22
Stub lines for ASM - SLG
See also chap. 3.10
Description-ASM 410
German
Englisch
Technical data
Table 6-8
6GT2 091-0D...
electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Technical data of ASM 410
Serial interface to SLG
RS 422
Connection (max.)
2 SLGs 4x can be connected via a separate bus module.
Line length (typ. max.)
1000 m/RS 422, depending on SLG and
type of cable
Number of SLGs
S Static operation
S Dynamic operation
2 SLG 4x
Interface to STG 4F
RS 422, 9-pin sub D plug connection
Interface for 24 V DC
Via a separate bus module
1 SLG 4x
Software functions
Programming
With STEP5 directly via process image
(PIO/PII); no function block required; 5
bytes processed per command
Optional: FB 41 for ASM 410. This FB is
available on the “MOBY Software”
floppy disk. Description is provided by
FB 250 documentation.
Commands
Select channel 1 or 2, read MDS, write
MDS, initialize MDS, etc.
Dialog operation
Yes
Supply voltage
Nominal value
24 V DC (residual ripple, max. of 10%)
Permissible range
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Internal (at 5 V)
Typical
20 to 60 mA
(20 mA = long cycle time)
(60 mA = short cycle time)
Max.
110 mA (PLC in STOP status)
External (at 24 V DC)
All SLGs switched off
90 mA
Power consumption, typ. (without SLG)
2.5 W
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-19
Interfaces
Table 6-8
Technical data of ASM 410
Cooling
Convection cooling
Isolation group
C in acc. w. VDE 0110
Protection rating
IP20 in acc. w. IEC 529
Physical stress
IEC 68-2-27
Ambient temperature
During operation
S Horizontal SIMATIC layout
S Vertical SIMATIC layout
0° to +60° C
During transportation and storage
–25° to +70° C
Dimensions (W x H x D)
45 x 135 x 100 mm
Weight (approx.)
0.25 kg
0° to +40° C
Slot in PLC S5-90U
PLC S5-90U provides a maximum of four slots for additional modules. Up
to two of these can be used by the ASM 410 module.
Slot in PLC S5-95U
The ASM 410 can only be operated with PLC S5-95U in slots 0 to 7. Up to
four modules can be used on one PLC.
Starting with CPU release status -8MA-3, 8 modules can be used.
Slot in PLC
S5-100U
S5-100U
6-20
The ASM 410 can only be operated with PLC S5-100U in slots 0 to 7. Up to
eight modules can be used on one PLC. See the following table for slotoriented addressing.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
64
to
71
72
to
79
80
to
87
88 96 104 112 120
to to
to
to
to
95 103 111 119 127
8
Slot number
Address assignment
Free slots for additional
digital modules
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Configuration of
ASM 410 in
ET 100U
The ASM 410 must be operated as an analog module in the ET 100U. When
parameterizing the module with the “COM ET 100U” software, the module
must be specified with “4AX” in the appropriate slot. The ASM 410 occupies eight input bytes and eight output bytes (i.e., 16 bytes). Since a maximum of 32 bytes can be assigned per ET 100U in the address image of the
main controller, a maximum of two modules per ET 100U are permitted.
When other modules are used with an ET 100U in addition to the ASM 410,
only one MOBY I module can be connected.
On the ET 100U, the ASM 410 can be addressed via all address areas of the
PLC (i.e., P, Q, IM3 and IM4).
SIMATIC
C
P
U
Central controller S5-115 U
S5-135 U
S5-155 U
ET 100U
Max. cable length
3000 m
Max. of 2 ASM 410s
per ET 100U
ASM 410
ET 100U
DI
DO
DO
Max. of 32 ET 100Us
Figure 6-18
Configuration of
ASM 410 in
ET 200U
Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U
The ASM 410 can be used with the ET 200U under the following conditions.
S The ET 200U with an ASM 410 installed must be operated in slow mode.
See ET 200U manual for how to set slow mode.
S The “COM ET 200U” software is used to parameterize the ASM 410.
The ASM 410 module must be parameterized there with “095”.
S Up to four ASM 410s can be used with one ET 200U. When DI/DO or
other periphery is used with the ET 200U, fewer ASM 410s can be used.
Otherwise the same conditions as for the ET 100U apply.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-21
Interfaces
Physical layout
The ASM 410 interface has the same dimensions as any standard module for
the SIMATIC S5-100U. The interface can be installed directly on the bus
module (6ES5 700-8MA11 or 6ES5 700-8MA21).
Ventilation slits of the adapter capsule: Make sure the ventilation slits
are not obstructed during operation.
Forced module ventilation is not required.
Label insert:
Short texts in English are
on the back.
LEDs
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
Fehler
aktiv
ANW
1.SLG
2.SLG
Power
1 2 3
Betriebsart
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
6 8 A
4
C
2 0 E
normal
ECC
Testbetr.
Test+ECC
INIT norm
INIT ECC
res.
res.
TEST
8 1.SLG
bzw.
2.SLG
9
res.
F
5
9
6
1
STG
6
Anschaltmodul
MOBY I
Status and error LEDs
A
B
Operating mode selection switch
Plug connector for serial S5 bus
9-pin sub D plug connector for
connection of STG 4F with stub line
6GT2091-0B...
(screw-type lock)
Attention: STG I (see chap. 7.3)
cannot be connected here.
Coding pin (not visible; on back of
module) in position “h” (i.e., analog
module)
10-pin plug connector for bus module (24 V supply; SLG connection)
6GT2 002-0BA00
1
Figure 6-19
6-22
2
3
4
5
6
ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Table 6-9
No.
Status and error LEDs of ASM 410
Color
Meaning
A1
Red
Error: The last command was concluded with an error, or the
hardware of the module is defective.
A2
Yellow
Rapid irregular flashing indicates running dialog with the SLG or
mobile data memory (MDS). This LED is always on when the
presence check is enabled.
A3
Green
Data memory is in the field of the SLG. The SLG which detected
the MDS is indicated via LEDs B1-B2. LED is only active when
presence check is being used.
B1
Green
B1 = 1st SLG is in operation.
Remember:
Only one of the LEDs (i.e., B1 or B2) may be on at a time. If both
LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG.
B2
Green
B2 = 2nd SLG is in operation.
Remember:
Only one of the LEDs (i.e., B1 or B2) may be on at a time. If both
LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG.
B3
Green
B3 = power on
This LED is always on when 24 V is applied to the module. The
interface module can be tested with the STG.
Setting the
operating mode
The operating mode is set with the operating mode selection switch on the
front of the ASM.
Positions 0 to 7
Setting of the operating mode:
ASM 410 uses the serial S5 bus. The STG interface is switched off.
Positions 8 to F
Test operation with the STG:
Telegrams from the S5 are no longer processed.
Note
The serial S5 bus functions are not affected by switching to test operation
since this interface has its own microprocessor and is not dependent on
MOBY activities.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-23
Interfaces
Table 6-10
Switch
Setting
6-24
Operating modes for ASM 410
Short Description on Label
Insert
Description
0
Normal
Normal operating mode; read and write all MDS types;
ECC driver is disabled.
1
ECC driver
Read and write all MDS types; EEC driver is enabled.
2
Test operation
All MDS types can be processed during test operation.
The ASM 410 performs stricter error checks for communication with the MDS so that weak points and
malfunctions can be detected during commissioning.
3
Test + ECC
The ECC driver is enabled. Otherwise same as switch
setting 2.
4
INIT normal
Initializes the MDS. When a write command is started
via the process image, an INIT command to the MDS
is started. The contents of the MDS are deleted.
5
INIT ECC
Initializes the MDS with ECC driver. Otherwise same
as switch setting 4.
6
Reserved
–
7
Reserved
–
8
Test 1st or 2nd
SLG
An STG can be connected via the 9-pin sub D plug
connector so that all MOBY I hardware can be tested.
9 to F
Reserved
–
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Wiring of one or
two SLGs
BUS
MODULE
Mounting rail
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
Terminal strip on bus module
Cable shield
Shield
+24 V
Gn
0V
Ye
Color ID3 for stub
lines from Siemens
Wh
Br
Pk
From external power
supply
Gr
1st SLG
Max. cable length = 1000 m1
Gn
Ye
Wh
Br
Pk
2nd SLG
Gr
Stub line incl. SLG plug connector and open end with core
sleeves 6GT2091-0D...2
1 Maximum cable length depends on the SLG and the tolerance of the external 24 V supply.
2 Lengths as per table 3-21
3 Color ID
Gr = green = pin 4 in SLG plug connector; Ye = yellow = pin 5 in SLG plug connector;
Wh = white = pin 6 in SLG plug connector; Br = brown = pin 1 in SLG plug connector;
Pk = pink = pin 2 in SLG plug connector; Gr = gray = pin 3 in SLG plug connector
Figure 6-20
Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-25
Interfaces
6.4
ASM 450/452
Application area
The ASM 450/452 interfaces are modules for operation of MOBY devices
via PROFIBUS DP / DPV1 on the following components.
S All computers and PCs
S All controllers
When the interfaces are used on a SIMATIC S7, function blocks are available
to the user.
Figure 6-21
ASM 450
ASM 450/452 interface
The ASM 450 accesses data on the MDS directly with physical addresses.
The ASM 450 uses cyclic operation with function block FB 240 (S5) or
FC 44 (S7). Appendix B of the FC 44 description is available to the
SIMATIC S5 user. All other users must use the description of the FC 44
function for the ASM 450.
Up to 2 SLGs can be connected to one ASM 450. Connection of two SLGs is
only recommended when static operation is used. When MDSs are processed
while passing by (i.e., dynamic operation), there is usually not enough time
to switch over the second SLG.
6-26
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
ASM 452
The ASM 452 is the further development of the familiar ASM 450/451
interface modules. Use of non-cyclic data communication on
PROFIBUS DPV1 ensures that optimum data throughput is achieved even
with large PROFIBUS configurations. The minimum cyclic data load of the
ASM 452 on PROFIBUS guarantees the user that other PROFIBUS stations
(e.g., DI/DQ) can continue to work at very high speeds.
Up to 2 SLGs can be run on the ASM 452 in pseudo parallel mode. Pseudo
parallel mode means that the user can start one command on 2 SLGs at the
same time (via FC 45) although the ASM has only one serial channel. The
ASM automatically handles the multiplexing between SLG 1 and SLG 2.
The SLG is processed on which an MDS happens to be. This delays the
processing of the second MDS. For this reason, we recommend only
processing the MDS statically when 2 SLGs are connected to the ASM. The
MDS data are accessed via physical addressing of the MDS. The SIMATIC
S7 offers FC 45 for this purpose. FC 45 gives the S7 user an easy-to-use
interface with powerful commands (e.g., one command processes an entire
MDS; command chaining; S7 data structures with UDTs).
The ASM 452 can also be parameterized as a dialog station. Only 1 SLG can
be used on channel 1 in this mode.
The available memory (VMDS) is 1280 bytes.
The MOBY I filehandler is also implemented on the ASM 452. The filehandler is a DOS-like file management system of the MOBY I identification system. It consists of a progam which is executed on the interface module.
FC 46 or FC 56 (S7) or FB 246 (S5) are available to SIMATIC users.
On PROFIBUS the ASM 452 exclusively uses non-cyclic mode via DPV1.
This provides excellent data throughput.
ASM 452 in
ASM 451 mode
The ASM 452 can be used in an ASM 451-compatible mode if you turn
switch 8 to OFF (see figure 6-30).
This means the GSD file siem804d can continue to be used.
Note
This mode only applies to systems which use the ASM 452 as a direct substitute for the discontinued ASM 451.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-27
Interfaces
Ordering data
Table 6-11
Ordering data for ASM 450/452
ASM 450 interface
for PROFIBUS DP,
max. of 2 SLGs connectable
6GT2 002-0EB00
ASM 452 interface
for PROFIBUS DPV1,
max. of 2 SLGs connectable
6GT2 002-0EB20
Accessories
Plug connector for PROFIBUS DP connection
and 24 V power supply
Connection cable, ASM 450/452 ´ SLG
2-m in length (standard); for other lengths see
chapter 3.10.4.
6GT2 091-1CH20
Opt. connection plug,
ASM 450/452 ´ SLG
6GT2 090-0BC00
M12 covering caps for unused SLG connection (only ASM 450 and ASM 452)
1 package = 10 each
3RX9 802-0AA0
MOBY software 1
with FB 246, FC 46, FC 56, FB 240, FC 44,
FC 45, GSD file
6GT2 080-2AA10
Other accessories for ASM 450/452
(network components)
See SIMATIC catalog ST 70 and
SIMATIC ET 200X manual.
Replacement part:
Plug connector plate; T-functionality for
PROFIBUS connection
6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0
Description-ASM 450/FC 44
German
English
French
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
Description-ASM 451/FC 46
German
English
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
Description-FC 56 (filehandler)
German
English
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
Description-FC 45 (for ASM 452)
German
English
French
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
Description-FB 246 for ASM 451 with S5
German
1
6-28
6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
See chapter 7.1.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Technical data
Table 6-12
Technical data of ASM 450/452
ASM 450
ASM 452
(Normal Addressing)
PROFIBUS DPV1
ASM 452
(Filehandler)
Serial interface to the user
PROFIBUS DP
Procedure in acc. w.
EN 50170, vol. 2, PROFIBUS
Connection
PG 11 screw connection
PROFIBUS and supply voltage plug connectors are not included.
Transmission speed
9600 baud to 12 Mbaud (automatic recognition)
Max. block length
208 bytes
2 words cyclic/
240 bytes acyclic
PROFIBUS DPV1
2 words cyclic/
240 bytes acyclic
Serial interface to the SLG
Plug connector
2 coupling plug connectors (M12)
Line length (max.)
1000 m, depends on SLG
(2 m = standard length, other cables: see chap. 3.10.4)
SLGs which can be connected
2 SLG 4x (multiplex
operation)
2 SLG 4x (pseudo parallel mode)
1 SLG 4x
Software functions
Programming
Depends on PROFIBUS DP master
Function blocks
SIMATIC S5
FB 240
–
FB 246 (for 155U with
IM 308-C)
SIMATIC S7
FC 44
FC 45
(Normal addressing)
FC 46
(filehandler, no multitag)
FC 56
(filehandler, with and
without multitag)
MDS addressing
Direct access via
addresses
Direct access via
addresses
Access via file system similar to DOS
Commands
Initialize MDS, read data
from MDS, write data to
MDS, and so on
Initialize MDS, read data
from MDS, write data to
MDS, and so on
Format MDS, read file,
write file, and so on
Dialog:
Normal Station/VMDS
Yes/no
Yes/yes
No/no
(Only 1 SLG can be used
on channel 1 in VMDS
mode.)
Dialog: memory size VMDS
–
1280 bytes
–
Supply voltage
Nominal value
24 V DC
Permissible range
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
180 mA (without SLG, DO not loaded)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-29
Interfaces
Table 6-12
Technical data of ASM 450/452
ASM 450
ASM 452
(Normal Addressing)
ASM 452
(Filehandler)
Digital inputs
Number
2
Galvanic isolation
Yes
None
None
None
None
Input voltage
For logical “0”
0 to 5 V DC
For logical “1”
13 to 30 V DC
Input current for signal “1”
7 mA (typ.)
Delay time
< 10 msec
Digital outputs
Number
2
Galvanic isolation
Yes
Max. permissible current
0.5 A
Short-circuit protection
Yes (electronic)
Line length (max.)
30 m
Ambient temperature
During operation
0° to +55° C
During transportation and storage
–40° to +70° C
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
134 x 110 x 55 (without bus plug)
Mounting
4 M5 screws, mounting on any plate or wall
Weight (approx.)
0.5 kg
Protection rating
IP67
6-30
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
AT-comp. PC
PROFIBUS DP
master module
(e.g., S7-400 CPU)
To additional
PROFIBUS
stations
2m
24 V for
ASM
and
SLGs
2nd SLG
(not for filehandler)
1st SLG
MDS
MDS
* Standard cable length
Figure 6-22
*
PROFIBUS cable
Configurator of ASM 450/452
Hardware
description
The ASM 450/452 is equipped with the same housing as the ET 200X decentral I/O device. See ET 200X manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA00-8AA0) for
general technical information on the ASM 450/452 (e.g., mounting, operation
and wiring, and general technical specifications). Accessories and power
supply components are also described in this manual.
PROFIBUS
configuration
The ASM 450/452 is integrated in the hardware configuration with a GSD
file. The ASM can then be configured via HWCONFIG of the SIMATIC
Manager or another PROFIBUS tool. The “Software MOBY” CD contains a
separate GSD file for each ASM model.
Operating mode
of ASM 452
The GSD file describes the permissible modes of the ASM 452. The hardware configuration tool (e.g. STEP 7 HW-Config) is used to set the mode.
SLG connection
technique
Since an SLG always occupies two M12 connection sockets on the
ASM 450/452, a prefabricated cable (cf. figure 6-24 or chapter 3.10) makes it
easy to connect the SLG. In its standard version, the connection cable has a
length of 2 m. For other cable lengths, see chapter 3.10.4.
An SLG plug connector with screw-type terminals is available for users who
want to make their own cable (see figure 6-23). Cable and SLG plug connector can be ordered from the MOBY catalog.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-31
Interfaces
Plug hood removed
SLG-cable: 6GT2 090-0Ajjj
PG11 screw connection, max. cable diameter = 6.5 mm (Do not tighten screw until
plug connector is assembled.)
50
2 screws to open
the plug connector
18.5
Protection
rating IP67
Figure 6-23
Coupling connector
M12 on ASM
1
2
3
4
5
6
S
S
Connection to
Pin of SLG
connector
Core
Color
Connector
Pin
5
6
S
S
1
2
3
4
Green
White
Brown
Yellow
Gray
Pink
Not conn.
Shield
4
6
1
5
3
2
-
Connection plug, ASM 450/452/473 SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00)
Two 5-pin, round M12
plug connectors
SLG plug
connector (socket)
2m *
25
X1/2
X1/3
18,5
X1/1
X1
X2
X1/4
X2/3
X2/1
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
6
1
4
5
3
2
X1/5
* Standard cable length
Figure 6-24
6-32
X2/5
Connection cable, ASM 450/452/473 SLG (6GT2 091-1CH20)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
PROFIBUS cable
with 24 V power
The ASM 450/452 can also be used with the “green” PROFIBUS cable.
Make sure that a 24 V cable is installed from X12 to X13. The 24 V line on
plug X12 can be connected to pin 5, 6.
X12
X13
Figure 6-25
X12
X11
X13
X11
PROFIBUS cable with 24 V power
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-33
Interfaces
SLG and DI/DO
configuration for
ASM 450/452
Plug
*
Figure 6-26
2nd
3rd
4th
5th *
SLG
-
SLG
2xDA
SLG
x3 – x4
-
SLG
2xDE
SLG
SLG
Normal
addressing
x3 x4
1st
x1 – x2
Plug
Filehandler
x1 x2
Config
Plug
Config
1st
2nd
3rd *
x1 – x2
SLG
-
SLG
x3 – x4
-
SLG
SLG
Config
1st
x1 – x2
SLG
x3 – x4
-
This configuration only applies to static processing
of the MDS.
SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452
The versions shown in figure 6-26 can be set up with the standard cables of
MOBY or ET 200X.
Note
Although the configuration with 2 SLGs + DI + DO is also possible with the
ASM 450, the components require special customer-related wiring.
The following figure shows a dimensional drawing of an ASM 450/452 with
bus connection plugs. You must add the length of the PG screw connection
and the radius of the cable used to the total width and depth specified.
110
53.5
28.25
Dimensional
drawing of
ASM 450/452 with
mounting holes
Ø 5.5
120
134
Figure 6-27
6-34
90
Dimensional drawing of the ASM 450/452
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Pin allocation
The following figure shows the pin allocation of the ASM 450/452.
ASM 450
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP
SF:
System fault (see table 6-13)
BF:
Bus fault (see table 6-13)
ON:
On when the logic voltage is present
on ASM (is generated from the
24 V suply voltage)
DC 24 V: On when the 24 V supply voltage is
connected to ASM
4 56
X11
SF
BF
12 3
4 56
ON
DC 24 V
X1
2
1
X12
SLG1
X2
3 RxD
5
4 ERR
12 3
ANW
DI0
4 56
X3
DI1
SLG2
X13
X4
RxD
12 3
LEDs for MOBY and ASM 452
ASM 452
4 56
X11
SF
BF
ON
DC 24 V
12 3
4 56
X1
2
1
X12
4
SLG1
X2
3 RxD
5
PRE/ERR 1 PRE/ERR 2
12 3
4 56
X13
X3
SLG2
X4
RxD
12 3
Socket
X11 and X12
(PROFIBUS DP)
X13
(Supply voltage)
* Do not circuit
Figure 6-28
LEDs for MOBY and ASM 450
RxD:
SLG active
ANW:
MDS present
or status of DA1
ERR:
Error indication
or status of DA0
SLG1/2:
Indicates the selected SLG. Only
SLG 1 or SLG 2 can be selected.
DI0/1:
Status of the digital inputs
Pin Allocation
1
Signal B (red)
2
PE
3*
PE
4
Signal A (green)
5*
L+
6*
M
1
PE
2
L+
3
M
4
PE
5
L+
6
M
RxD:
SLG with command active
PRE/ERR 1, MDS present or error
PRE/ERR 2: indication for each SLG.
(“MDS present” always takes priority.
The error indication only appears
when no MDS is present.)
MDS present:
The LED is permanently ON. If more
than one MDS is in the field, the
number of MDSs is indicated by brief
interruptions of the light.
No error output is made.
Error indication:
The LED is permanently OFF. The last
error no. is indicated by brief pulses
of light.
SLG 1:
SLG 1 is selected.
SLG 2:
SLG 2 is selected.
Only SLG 1 or SLG 2
can be selected at one time.
Socket
X1/X3
X2/X4
Pin Allocation (SLG)
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
+RxD
+TxD
-TxD
-RxD
PE
X2
+ 24 V
DO1
0V
DO0
PE
X4
+ 24 V
DI1
0V
DI0
PE
Pin allocation and LEDs of ASM 450/452
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-35
Interfaces
Table 6-13
LED
“BF”
LED
“SF”
On
*
LED indication for PROFIBUS diagnosis
Cause of Error
S
S
S
S
S
Error Handling
ASM is starting up.
–
Connection to the DP master has failed.
S Check PROFIBUS DP connection.
S Check the DP master.
S Check all cables in your PROFIBUS DP net-
ASM found no baud rate.
Bus failure
work.
DP master is out of order.
S Check to determine whether connection plug
for PROFIBUS DP is securely plugged into the
ASM.
Flashing
On
S The configuration data sent by the DP
master to the ASM does not match the
setup of the ASM.
S Check the configuration of the ASM (input/
output, PROFIBUS address).
S Correct GSD file used?
(SIEM804C.GSD or SIEM80B6.GSD)
Flashing
On
*
Off
S ASM has found the baud rate but is not
S Check the PROFIBUS address on the ASM or
S ASM was not configured.
S Check the configuration of the ASM (station
S The ASM has a hardware defect
S Replace the ASM.
addressed by the DP master.
Flashing
in the configuration software.
type).
Status is irrelevant.
Example for bared
lengths
The following figure shows an example of bared lengths. The lengths are
valid for all cables which you can connect to the connection plug. Any shield
braiding must be twisted, inserted in a core end sleeve, and the excess cut off.
45
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Twisted and trimmed
shield braiding
6
Figure 6-29
6-36
Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
PROFIBUS
address and
terminating
resistance
The plug plate must be removed from the ASM before you can set the
PROFIBUS address or circuit the terminating resistance. The plug plate covers the DIP switches. The following figure shows the location of the DIP
switches on the ASM and a sample setting of each.
Example:
Terminating resistance is off (status on delivery)
on
off
Example: PROFIBUS address 120 (status on delivery)
23 +24 + 25 + 26 = 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 = 120
ASM 450
ASM 452
N. c.
Normal operation
ON
N. c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 6-30
ASM 451 – compatible
(use GSD siem804d)
Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the terminating resistance
Note
S The PROFIBUS address on the ASM 450/452 must always correspond to
the PROFIBUS address specified for this ASM with the configuration
software.
S For correct functioning of the terminating resistance, always switch both
DIP switches of the terminating resistance to “On” or “Off”.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-37
Interfaces
6.5
ASM 454/424
Application area
The ASM 454/424 interfaces have been developed for decentralized setup
with assembly lines. The attractive but robust housing fits anywhere. Up to
four read/write devices from the MOBY I family can be connected and operated simultaneously. This ensures dynamic operation of the connected SLG.
The user can choose between the following two interfaces.
S PROFIBUS DPV1 (ASM 454)
S RS 232, serial interface to the PC (ASM 424)
Figure 6-31
ASM 454
ASM 454/424 interface
The ASM 454 uses physical addresses to directly access the data on the
MDS. The non-cyclic protocol service of PROFIBUS DPV1 is used for communication with the user. Function FC 45 is available to SIMATIC S7 users
for easy integration.
The description of the PROFIBUS DPV1 implementation is available for
programmers of other controllers. See appendix of the FC 45 description.
ASM 424
6-38
The ASM 424 uses physical addresses to directly access the data on the
MDS. A serial RS 232 interface with the 3964R protocol is used for communication with the user. This makes it easy to connect external controllers to
the MOBY I identification system. A C library (MOBY API) is available for
the PC user for his/her applications.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Ordering data
Table 6-14
Ordering data for ASM 454/424
ASM 454 interface
for use of MOBY I components via
PROFIBUS DPV1, without filehandler
6GT2 002-2EE00
6GT2 002-2CE00
ASM 424 interface
with serial interface RS 232/RS 422; 3964R procedure for PC, SICOMP and external controllers
Accessories:
RS 232 stub line between PC <–> ASM 424; can
be fabricated up to a max. of 32 m based on the
length key (see chapter 3.10.4).
6GT2 391-0B...
SLG stub line (see chapter 3.10)
6GT2 091-0A...
Plug connector for power supply (socket) for
ASM 454/424
6GT2 390-1AB00
Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting
6GT2 390-0BA00
Wide-range power pack
100 to 230 V AC/24 V DC, 2.2 A
(without 24 V cable)
6GT2 494-0AA00
24 V DC stub line for wide-range power pack
6GT2 494-0AA00 (see chapter 7.2)
Length: 5 m
6GT2 491-1HH50
PROFIBUS plug connector
9-pin sub D conn. for 2 stub lines
6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0
(see catalog ST 70 or IK PI for
more connectors)
Software MOBY1
with C library for ASM 424 (MOBY API),
and FC 45, GSD file for ASM 454
6GT2 080-2AA10
Description, FC 45 (for ASM 454)
German
English
French
Description, MOBY API (C-lib for ASM 424)
German
English
1
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
See chapter 7.1.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-39
Interfaces
Technical data
Table 6-15
Technical data of ASM 454/424
ASM 454
ASM 424
Serial interface to the user
PROFIBUS DPV1
RS 232/RS 422
Line length (max.)
See PROFIBUS configuration
30/500 m
Procedure/protocol
EN 50 170 vol. 2 PROFIBUS
3964R
Connection
9-pin sub D socket (screw lock)
Transmission speed
9600 baud to 12 Mbaud
(automatic recognigion)
9.6; 19.2;
38.4 Kbaud
(automatic recognition with
3964R)
Max. block length
4 words (cyclic)/238 bytes
(non-cyclic)
238 bytes
Serial interface to the SLG
4 x 9-pin submin. D socket (screw lock)
Line length
Max. of 1000 m; depends on SLG (see chap. 3.10)
Connectable SLG
4 x SLG 4x (parallel operation)
Software functions
Programming
Depends on PROFIBUS DPV1
master
MOBY API:
C lib for PC with
Windows 98/NT
SIMATIC S7 function
block
FC 45
–
MDS addressing
Direct access via addresses
Direct access via
addresses
Commands
Initialize MDS, read data from MDS,
write data to MDS
Initialize MDS,
read data from
MDS, write data
to MDS
Dialog
No (on request)
No (on request)
Supply voltage
6-40
Connection plug
4-pin M12 round plug (pin)
Nominal value
24 V DC
Permissible range
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
(max.)
250 mA (without SLG)
Max. switch-on current
1.1 A (without SLG)
UL/CSA
Yes, when used with an NEC class 2 power supply
Ambient temperature
During
g operation
p
Transportation and storage
–25 to +55 °C (no
( condensation))
–40 to +85 °C (no condensation)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Table 6-15
Technical data of ASM 454/424
ASM 454
ASM 424
Housing
Dimensions (W x H x D)
in mm
205 x 130 x 60 (without plug)
Material
Aluminum
Color
Anthracite
Mounting
4 M5 screws
Optional: Top hat rail mounting
Tightening torque
v 3 Nm
Approx. weight
1300 g
Protection rating
IP40 (higher ratings on request)
MTBF (at 40 ° C)
1 ⋅ 105 hours
6GT2 491-1HH50
24 V=
230 V
PROFIBUS:
Plug = 6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0
6GT2 494-0AA00 or
other 24 V connection
RS 232:
PC cable = 6GT2 391-0B...
RS 422:
Make cable as shown
in figure 6-34.
6GT2 091-0A...
Figure 6-32
SLG
SLG
SLG
SLG
MDS
MDS
MDS
MDS
Configurator for ASM 454/424
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-41
Interfaces
Pin assignment
and switches
RxD
PRE
ERR
Plugs 1 to 4 to the SLG
Socket
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Hous.
RxD:
SLG with active command
PRE:
“Presence” indicates presence of an MDS in the transmission window.
ERR:
Error indicated by flashing LED
Figure 6-33
Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the SLG
PROFIBUS
SERIAL
DC 24 V
ON:
(green)
24 V present on ASM
SF/BF:
(red)
System fault/bus
fault, RAM error
ASM 424: flashes
after power-on.
Flashing stops
after first real
telegram.
SF/BF
ON
ACT
ACT:
(green)
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
:
Switch 7 ON: 26
Example: PROFIBUS address= 84
(22 + 24 + 26)
Switch 1 to 7: Operating mode,
serial interface 2
Switch 1 to 7 = 0FF:
Default: 3964R
Switch 1 to 7 ≠ 0FF:
See other
operating modes
of the ASM 424
1
3
4
1
2
3
4
Designation
Ground
+ 24V
+ 24V
Ground
1
PROFIBUS
Socket
1
2
3
4
5
6
Socket
Switch 12: Presence check in
1-channel mode 2
ON:
Presence check by firmware
OFF: Presence check off
6-42
Pin
2
Designation
Not used
Not used
B line (red)
Request to Send (RTS)
Ground 5 V (M5)
Potential 5 V
(floating, 60 mA)
Not used
A line (green)
Not used
Cable shield
SERIAL 2
Switches 9 to 11: Not used
Figure 6-34
DC 24 V
7
8
9
Hous.
Switch 8: Interface 2
ON:
RS 422
OFF:
RS 232
Only for ASM 454
Only for ASM 424
This LED briefly
flashes once when
a command has been
processed.
8 9 10 11 12
Switch 1 to 7: PROFIBUS address 1
Switch 1 ON: 20
Switch 2 ON: 21
1
2
Designation
Not used
+ Sending
+ Receiving
Nor used
– Receiving
– Sending
Ground (0 V)
+ 24 V
Not used
Cable shield
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Hous.
RS 232
RS 422
Not used
TxD (sending)
RxD (receiving)
Not used
Ground (0V)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Cable shield
Not used
–TxD
–RxD
Not used
Ground
Not used
Not used
+TxD
+RxD
Cable shield
Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the user
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Further operating
modes of the
ASM 424
Starting with release status C, the ASM 424 offers more operating modes.
The expanded operating modes are set with switches 1 to 8 and 12.
ON = 1
OFF = 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12
Switches
...
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 s
0
0
1
Default; 3964R
Serial interface = RS 232
Serial interface = RS 422
(Baud rates 9600, 19200 and 38400
are recognized automatically.)
0 0 y y y 0 1 s
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
9600 Baud
19200 Baud
38400 Baud
0 1 y y y m 0 s
p
0
1
0 1 y y y 0 1 s
*
1-channel mode**; 3964R
Slave with 3964R
Master with 3964R
0
1
Presence check off
Presence check on
p
1-channel mode**; LAUF driver*
With the LAUF driver, each user byte is transferred with two ASCII bytes.
Example:
The data string with the user data 01 02 00 00 hex must appear on the line as
shown below:
02
30
31
30
32
30
30
30
30
0A
03 (hex)
STX
**
LAUF driver*
Channel
(ASCII)
User data
(ASCII)
CR ETX
(opt.)
1-channel mode
1-channel mode is compatible with the ASM 420. In this mode the ASM 424
replaces an ASM 420. Only one SLG can be run on channel 1. The channel byte
is omitted in the protocol.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-43
Interfaces
Dimensional
drawing with
mounting holes
205
129
Grounding
bolts (N4)
Figure 6-35
Dimensional drawing of ASM 454/424
Adapter floor plate
for top-hat-rail
mounting
Item
3
Quantity
Floor plate
1
2
Profile
1
3
Oval headscrew,
M5 x 10
4
4
Washer, A5.3
4
5
Countersunk
screw, M4 x 10
2
4
5
Designation
1
1
2
Figure 6-36
Mounting diagram for the adapter floor plate
Note
To adjust to the particular situation, the profile section (item 2) can be turned
by 90° and then installed on the floor plate.
6-44
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
6.6
ASM 470/475
Application area
The ASM 470/475 interface can be installed in the SIMATIC S7-300 and
ET 200M. It can be used for all MOBY systems.
Up to eight ASM 470/475 interfaces can be installed and operated in one
module rack of the SIMATIC S7-300. When a layout with several module
racks (maximum of four) is used, the ASM 470/475 can be installed and
operated in each of these module racks. In a maximum SIMATIC S7-300
configuration, up to 32 ASM can be used centrally. The ASMs can also be
used in the distributed I/O ET 200M on PROFIBUS. This makes use in an
S7-400 environment possible. Up to 7 ASMs can be operated per ET 200M.
Error messages and operational states are indicated with LEDs. Galvanic
isolation between SLG and the SIMATIC S7-300 bus ensure layouts which
are not as susceptible to interference.
Figure 6-37
ASM 470
ASM 470/475 interface
In multiplex operation, up to two SLGs can be connected to the ASM 470.
The FC 47 function block ensures simple programming via SIMATIC S7
tools. The FC 47 can be used with both the S7-300 and the S7-400. The
ET 200M can also be used to operate the ASM 470 in a SIMATIC S5 environment. FB 47 is available for PLCs 115U to 155U.
On the hardware side, communication between ASM 470 and the S7-300
CPU is handled by a 16-byte address area so that up to 12 bytes of user data
can be transferred with each read/write command.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-45
Interfaces
ASM 475
The ASM 475 (order number 6GT2 002-0GA10) is a parameterizable module. This means the basic functions have already been specified when the
module was configured in HW-Config (e.g., normal addressing or filehandler).
ASM 475
(normal
addressing)
The ASM 475 accesses the data on the MDS directly with physical addresses.
The FC 45 function controls use in a SIMATIC S7.
ASM 475
(filehandler)
The MOBY I filehandler is implemented on the ASM 475. The filehandler is
a file management system similar to DOS for the MOBY I identification system. It consists of a program which is executed on the interface module. The
MDS and SLG MOBY I components are identical, with and without filehandler. The FC 56 function controls operation in a SIMATIC S7.
Together the ASM 475 and FC 45 form a unit which can be used to read the
MDS data easily and at optimum speed. A 32-Kbyte MDS memory can be
read in 24 seconds, almost without regard to the S7 cycle time.
ASM 470
ASM 475
Shield connecting element
(6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0)
for 2 modules
Shield connection terminal
(6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0)
6GT2 091-0E...
(see chap. 3.10
or figure 6-40)
Figure 6-38
6-46
SLG
SLG
MDS
MDS
Configurator for ASM 470/475
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Ordering data
Table 6-16
Ordering data for ASM 470/475
Interface ASM 470
for SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG multiplex;
no front plug
6GT2 002-0FA10
Interface ASM 475
for SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG parallel;
normal addressing; no front plug
6GT2 002-0GA10
Accessories
Front connector (1 per ASM)
6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0
Shield connection terminal (1 per SLG cable)
6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0
Shield connecting element (1 per 2 ASMs)
6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0
Connection cable, ASM ↔ SLG
6GT2 091-0E...
MOBY software1
with FC 47, FB 47 for ASM 470,
FC 45 for ASM 475 with normal addressing
FC 56 for ASM 475 with filehandler
6GT2 080-2AA10
Description-ASM 470/FC 47 for S7
German
English
Electronically on the
“Software MOBY” CD
Description-ASM 470/FB 47 for S5
German
Englisch
Electronically on the
“Software MOBY” CD
Description-FC 45 (ASM 475)
German
Englisch
French
Description-FC 56 (ASM 475, filehandler)
German
Englisch
1
Electronically on the
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically on the
“Software MOBY” CD
See chapter 7.1.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-47
Interfaces
Technical data
Table 6-17
Technical data of ASM 470/475
ASM 470
ASM Type
Interface to S7-300 or ET 200M
ASM 475
(Normal Addressing)
ASM 475
(Filehandler)
P-bus; I/O input and I/O
output
P-bus; cyclic and non-cyclic services
Communication
16 bytes I/O
2 words (cyclic); 238 bytes (non-cyclic)
Command buffer on ASM
1 x 12 bytes per ASM
70 x 238 bytes per SLG
1 x 238 bytes per SLG
Serial interface to the SLG
Plug connector
Via screw terminals on front plug
Front plug connector is not included.
Line length, max.
Standard cable = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m
(up to 1000 m on request)
MOBY systems supported
I/E/F/V
I/E/F/U
I/U
Connectable SLGs
Multiplex
2 x SLG
Parallel
2 x SLG
Parallel
2 x SLG
Software functions
Programming
SIMATIC user: With FC/FB
Other users: Telegram description as per appendix of FC description
Function block
SIMATIC S7
FC 47
FC 45
FC 56
SIMATIC S5
FB 47
–
–
MDS addressing
Direct access via addresses
Access via logical file
names
Commands
Initialize MDS, read data from MDS,
write data to MDS
Format MDS, read file,
write file, etc.
MOBY I dialog:
Normal station/VMDS
Yes/yes
No/no
PROFIBUS diagnosis
Yes. Can be parameterized via RESET.
S7 diagnosis
No
Yes. Can be called via S7 OM.
Firmware reloadable
No
Yes. Via SIMATIC Manager.
Yes/no
Power supply
Nominal value
24 V DC
Permissible range
20 V to 30 V DC
20.4 V to 28.8 V DC
S Without SLG at
50 mA
350 mA
S With SLG connected
Max. of 600 mA with
one SLG
Max. of 300 mA per SLG
when two SLGs are connected
Max. of 500 mA per connected SLG
Current consumption
U = 24 V DC, max.
6-48
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Table 6-17
Technical data of ASM 470/475
ASM Type
ASM 470
Power loss of the
module, typical
ASM 475
(Normal Addressing)
ASM 475
(Filehandler)
1W
2W
Current consumption from
P-bus, max.
100 mA
80 mA
Galvanic isolation between
S7-300 and MOBY
Depends (100 kΩ
between S7-300 and
24 V DC)
Yes. Use for ungrounded operation of a separate
power pack for the ASM.
Fuse, 24 V to SLG
Yes. Electronic.
Yes. Electronic.
Ambient temperature
During operation
S SIMATIC horizontal
0° C to +60° C
S SIMATIC vertical
0° C to +40° C
During transportation and
storage
–40° C to +70° C
Dimensions in mm (W x H x D)
40 x 125 x 120
Weight, approx.
0.2 kg
Wiring
The ASM 470/475 is commissioned with the following steps.
S Mount module
S Mount module on the S7-300 mounting rail. See S7-300 manual.
Note
The CPU of the S7-300 must be switched to STOP status before the module
is mounted.
!
Warning
The S7-300 may only be wired when the voltage is off.
Note
To ensure interference-free operation of the ASM 475, make sure that ASM
and SIMATIC CPU (or ASM and IM 153 with ET 200M) are run on the
same voltage.
Non-adherence may cause possible error messages on the CPU not to be
cleared when the ASM is turned on.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-49
Interfaces
Front panel
The following figure shows the front plate of the ASM 470/475 and the inside of the front door with the related connection diagram. The SLGs must
be connected to the ASM as shown in the connection diagram.
MOBY
MOBY
ASM470
SF
ASM475
SF
DC5 V
24 V
ANW
ACT_1
Active
T+
PRE_1
T–
SLG 1
RxD_1
SLG 1
ERR_1
Error
R+
RxD
R–
T+
T–
Error
ERR_2
SLG 2
PRE_2
RxD
RxD_2
6GT2 002-0FA10
R+
R–
6GT2 002-0GA10
Status and error indicators
Figure 6-39
SLG 2
ACT_2
Connection diagram
The numbers for the connection are based on plug
connector X1 located on the
upper part of the housing.
Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475
Indicator elements
on ASM
Table 6-18
Function of the LEDs on ASM 470/475
ASM 475
ASM 470
Meaning
SF
SF
System fault (hardware error on ASM)
24 V
DC 5 V
24 V are connected to ASM.
5 V voltage on ASM is okay.
Active
ACT_1, ACT_2
The appropriate SLG is processing a user command.
6-50
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Table 6-18
Function of the LEDs on ASM 470/475
ASM 470
ASM 475
Meaning
Error
ERR_1, ERR_2
The flashing pattern shows the last error. This indicator can be reset with the option_1 parameter.
ANW
PRE_1, PRE_2
Indicates the presence of an MDS
RxD
RxD_1, RxD_2
Indicates communication to the SLG . Interference
on SLG can also cause this LED to light up.
SLG 1, SLG 2
–
Indicates the SLG which was selected by the user
command. Only one LED may light up at a time
(multiplex operation).
Additional operational states are indicated on the ASM 475 on the LEDs
PRE, ERR, and SF.
Table 6-19
SF
Additional LEDs on the ASM 475
PRE_1
ERR_1
PRE_2
ERR_2
Description, Causes, Remedy
ON
OFF/ON
ON (perm.)
OFF/ON
ON (perm.)
Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, ...)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Loader is defective (can only be fixed at the plant).
OFF
2 Hz
OFF
2 Hz
OFF
Firmware is being loaded or no firmware detected.
→ Load firmware.
→ Do not turn off ASM.
OFF
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
Firmware loading terminated with error
→ New start required.
→ Load firmware again.
→ Check update files.
Any
5 Hz
5 Hz
5 Hz
5 Hz
Operating system error
→ Turn ASM on/off.
OFF
OFF
1 x flash
every 2 sec
OFF
1 x flash
every 2 sec
ASM has booted and is waiting for a RESET
(init_run) from the user.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-51
Interfaces
Wiring to the SLG
The figure below shows a connection cable between ASM and SLG. The
colors apply to the standard MOBY cable for the ASM 470. See
chapter 3.10.3.
Front plug connector
of ASM
(6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0)
Cable with core sleeves
SLG plug connector
(socket)
White
4 (12)
Brown
5 (13)
Green
6 (14)
Yellow
7 (15)
Pink
8 (16)
Grey
9 (17)
6
1
4
5
2
3
(Shield)
Cable shield bared
Figure 6-40
Wiring of ASM 470/475 to SLG (6GT2 091-0E...)
Shield connection
See chapter 3.9 or figure 6-38.
Lightning protection
Implement the lightning protection and grounding measures required for your
application. Lightning protection measures always require individual consideration of the entire system.
Customer cable
fabricating
To ensure EMC, the SLG cable must be led over an S7-300 shield connecting
element. When customers make their own cables, the shield of the SLG cable
must be bared as shown in figure 6-41.
30
Figure 6-41
6-52
170
Specifications
in mm
Baring of the cable shield when customer makes own cable
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Configuration
of ASM for
SIMATIC S7
under STEP 7
Note
Installation of MOBY requires functional STEP 7 software on the PC/PG.
Installation and configuration of the ASM 470/475 in the SIMATIC is handled by an installation program. The installation program is included with
the “MOBY software” product (6GT2 080-2AA10).
Installation
The “Software MOBY” CD contains the installation files in subdirectory
S7_om. Installation is almost completely automatic when Setup.exe is called. The specified steps during SETUP must be responded to.
Note
Remember that you will have to execute a separate Setup for installation of
ASM 470 and ASM 475.
The ASM 470/475 module is located in the hardware catalog of HWCONFIG
under the following subdirectory for hardware configuration of the SIMATIC
S7.
SIMATIC 300
SM 300
Special 300
MOBY ASM470
MOBY ASM475*
6GT2 002-0GA00
* Discontinued
Figure 6-42
MOBY ASM475 PARAM
6GT2 002-0GA10
ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-53
Interfaces
FC 45/47 with
sample project
You can use the file-dearchivation function of the SIMATIC Manager to load
the FC with a sample project from the applicable subdirectory of the
“Software MOBY” CD. Afterwards, the sample project is located in the
directory S7PROJ of the SIMATIC Manager.
ASM Type
6-54
Directory in
“Software MOBY”
Project Name in
SIMATIC Manager
Path Name in
SIMATIC Manager
ASM 470
FC47
ASM470_CPU416
ASM470_C
ASM 475
FC45
MOBY FC45
Moby_f_1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
6.7
ASM 473
Application area
The ASM 473 interface is a MOBY module for the SIMATIC S7. It can
be installed in the ET 200X and DESINA distributed I/O device. The interface of the ET 200X to the user is PROFIBUS DPV1. An S7-300 or S7-400
with integrated PROFIBUS connection can be used as the controller.
The ASM 473 supplements the SIMATIC S7 MOBY interface modules
ASM 470 and ASM 475. Its protection rating of IP67 permits it to be
set up and operated directly in the process without additional protection.
Other features:
S Up to 7 ASM 473s can be operated in one ET 200X station.
S All I/O modules from the ET 200X family can be run parallel to the
ASM 473.
ASM 473
(normal
addressing)
The MDS data are accessed by physically addressing the MDS.
ASM 473
(filehandler)
The MOBY I filehandler is implemented on the ASM 473. The filehandler is
a file management system similar to DOS for the MOBY I identification system. It consists of a program which is executed on the interface module. The
MDS and SLG MOBY I components are identical, with and without filehandler. The FC 56 function controls operation in a SIMATIC S7.
The FC 45 function is available for use in a SIMATIC S7. The hardware configuration of the ASM 473 is performed with an Object Manager which is
integrated in the SIMATIC Manager.
Figure 6-43
ASM 473 interface
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-55
Interfaces
Ordering data
Table 6-20
Ordering data of ASM 473
ASM 473 interface module
6GT2 002-0HA10
Accessories:
SLG cable (2 m = standard cable)
For other lengths, see chapter 3.10.4
6GT2 091-1CH20
Opt. ASM connection plug without SLG cable
(for cable lengths up to 1000 m)
6GT2 090-0BC00
Software MOBY with 1
6GT2 080-2AA10
FC 45 for normal addressing
FC 56 for filehandler
Description of FC 45
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
German
English
French
Description of FC 56
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
German
English
1
Technical data
See chapter 7.1.
Table 6-21
Technical data of ASM 473
Normal Addressing
Filehandler
Interface to ET 200X
SIMATIC S7 P-bus
Cyclic and non-cyclic services
Communication
2 words (cyclic)/
238 bytes (non-cyclic)
Command buffer in ASM
70 x 238 bytes
1 x 238 bytes
Serial interface to SLG
6-56
Plug connector
2 x coupling plug, M12
Line length, max.
20 m
2 m = standard length
Other fabricatable cables = 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m
(up to 1000 m on request)
Connectable SLGs
1 x SLG 4x
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Table 6-21
Technical data of ASM 473
Normal Addressing
Filehandler
Software functions
Programming
Depends on PROFIBUS DP master
SIMATIC S7
function block
FC 45
FC 56
MDS addressing
Direct access via
addresses
Access via logical file
names
Commands
Initialize MDS,
read data from MDS,
write data to MDS
Format MDS,
read file, write file,
etc.
MOBY I dialog:
Normal station/VMDS
Yes/no
No/no
PROFIBUS diagnosis
Yes; ET 200X basic station.
S7 diagnosis
Yes. Can be called via S7 OM.
Reloadable firmware
Yes. Via SIMATIC Manager.
Power supply
Nominal value
24 V DC
Permissible range
20.4 V to 28.8 V DC
Current consumption
S From encoder
75 mA, typical
S From load voltage
Max. of 500 mA (or see technical data of connected
SLG)
Power loss of module
1.6 W, typical
Digital inputs
Via expansion modules from ET 200X family
Digital outputs
Via expansion modules from ET 200X family
voltage
(SLG power)
Ambient temperature
During operation
0° C to +55° C
During transportation
and storage
–40° C to +70° C
Dimensions
(W x H x D) in mm
Dimensions of single
devices
87 x 110 x 55
Dimensions of scale
60 x 110 x 55
Mounting
2 M5 screws (customer)
2 M3 screws (device)
Protection rating
IP67
Weight
0.275 kg
MTBF (at 40° C)
106 hours
For setup guidelines and other general technical data, see the ET 200X
manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0).
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-57
Interfaces
Configuration
PROFIBUS DP master module
(e.g., S7-400 CPU)
(Connection of other master is
under preparation.)
PROFIBUS
cable to all
PROFIBUS slaves
2 m (standard cable length)
Basic module
BM 141
BM 142
BM 143
BM 147
24 V for ET 200X
electronics and
MOBY-SLG
Figure 6-44
SLG
MDS
Configurator for an ASM 473
Note
In contrast to ASM 45x (see figure 6-22), the 24 V power must be provided
on the PROFIBUS plug and the load voltage plug. For details, see ET 200X
manual.
6-58
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Basic module –
prequisites for use
of ASM 473
The following table shows the status of the ET 200X basic modules as of
10/2002. The functions of new basic modules are stored in HW-Config of
SIMATIC Manager.
Table 6-22
Prerequisites for use of ASM 473
Can Be Run with
ASM 473
(6GT2 002–0HA00)*
Can Be Run with
ASM 473 PARAM
(6GT2 002-0HA10)
6ES7 141-1BF00-0XB0
No
No
6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0
Yes
Yes
6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0
No
No
6ES7 141-1BF10-0XB0
No
No
6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0
Yes
Yes
6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0
Yes
Yes
6ES7 142-1BD10-0XB0
No
No
6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0
No
No
6ES7 142-1BD20-0XB0
No
No
6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0
Yes
Yes
6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0
No
Yes**
6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0
Yes
Yes
6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0
Yes
Yes
6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0
No
No
6ES7 147-1AA01-0XB0
No
Yes
Order Number of
ET 200X Basic Module
*
**
Discontinued
Prerequisites for use: Please parameterize the module 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 in
HW-Config.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-59
Interfaces
Up to 7 ASM 473s can be operated
in one ET 200X.
Figure 6-45
Maximum configuration of ASM 473 on an ET 200X
Depending on the PROFIBUS master, up to 123 ET 200X modules can be
run on one PROFIBUS branch.
Hardware
configuration
The ASM 473 is integrated in the hardware configuration of SIMATIC
Manager by calling Setup.exe in the directory Daten\S7_OM on the “Software MOBY” CD. Currently, the ASM 473 cannot be integrated in other
masters.
SLG connection
An SLG always occupies the two M12 connection sockets (X3 and X 4) on
the ASM 473. A prefabricated cable (cf. figure 6-24 or chapter 3.10) ensures
easy connection of the SLG. The standard version of this cable is 2 m in
length. Other lengths are available on request.
An SLG connection plug with screw terminals (see figure 6-23) is available
for users who want to make their own cable. Cable and SLG connection plug
can be ordered from the MOBY catalog.
6-60
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Pin assignment
The following figure shows the pin assignment to the SLG and the indicator
elements.
Socket
Pin assignment (SLG)
X3
1
2
3
4
5
+RxD
+TxD
–TxD
–RxD
PE
X4
1
2
3
4
5
+24 V
n. c.
0V
n. c.
PE
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP
General operational indicators (SF, BF, ON, DC24 V) are located on the
basic module of the ET 200X.
LEDs for MOBY
RxD: SLG is busy with a command.
PRE: Indicates the presence of an MDS
ERR: Flashing pattern (see appendix B.1) indicates error.
Additional operational states of the ASM are indicated on the LEDs PRE and
ERR.
PRE
ERR
Description, Causes, Remedy
OFF/ON
ON (perm.)
Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, ...).
ON
OFF
Loader is defective (can only be repaired at the
plant).
2 Hz
OFF
Firmware is being loaded or no firmware detected.
→ Load firmware.
→ Do not turn off ASM.
2 Hz
2 Hz
Firmware loading terminated with error
→ New start required.
→ Load firmware again.
→ Check update files.
5 Hz
5 Hz
Operating system error
→ Turn ASM or ET 200X basis station off/on.
OFF
ASM booted and is waiting for a RESET (init_run)
1 x flash
every 2 sec from the user.
Figure 6-46
Pin asssignment and LEDs of ASM 473
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-61
Interfaces
The figure below shows the dimensions for the positions of the holes for the
screws. This information applies to a basic module and an expansion module
(ASM 473).
120
n
126.8
BM 141/142
60
87
110
53.5
28.25
Dimensions for the
mounting holes
For M5
mounting
screw
ASM 473
n = number of expansion modules
Figure 6-47
6-62
Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
6.8
SIM Serial Interface Module
Application area
SIM (i.e., Serial Interface Module) is a general-purpose module for operation
of MOBY I via a serial interface on any of the components below.
S Computers
S PCs
S PLC of other manufacturers
Its sturdy housing permits it to be used in rugged environments and makes it
resistant to many chemical substances.
Layout and
function
SIM combines an ASM interface and an SLG read/write device in one housing.
It is available with one of three interfaces (i.e., RS 422, TTY or V.24).
All SIM models can be operated with various procedures (i.e., 3964R, Lauf,
SINEC L1 and the SINUMERIK protocol).
AT-comp. PC
SIEMENS
SITOP
power 2.5
6GT2 332-1SH12
Cable length ≤ 3 m
SIM
MDS
Figure 6-48
Configurator for SIM
The connecting cable between the power supply unit and the SIM may not
exceed a length of 3 m. Power supply units which are to be operated in
connection with a SIM must have a feedback attenuation of at least 20 dB
at 134 kHz. One suitable power supply unit is, for example, the
SITOP power 2.5 from Siemens (order number 6EP1 332-1SH12).
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-63
Interfaces
SIM hardware
The transmission window
for all MDS types is located
above or below the Siemens label.
Plastic housing of
polyamide 12
Screw-type lock (for all interface models) (inch
threading 2.54 mm)
Diagonal mounting
holes for M5 screws
Figure 6-49
Ordering data
Table 6-23
25-pin sub D plug connector for:
– Serial interface
– Baud rate setting
– Specification of the transmission procedure
– Control of the data carrier
− Voltage supply of the module (24 V DC)
SIM serial interface module
Ordering data for SIM
Serial interface module SIM
consisting of ASM interface
and read/write device
6GT2 005-0AA10
SIM 41 with V.24 (RS 232) interface
SIM 42 with RS 422 (RS 485, V.11) interface 6GT2 005-0BA10
6GT2 005-0CA10
SIM 43 with TTY (20 mA linear current)
interface
MOBY software1
with 3964R drivers and tools for DOS
and Windows 95/NT
6GT2 080-2AA10
25-pin submin. D plug connector
(not included)
6AW5 418-4F
Stub lines and accessories
See chapter 3.10
Description-SIM
German
English
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
Description-T3964R (DOS), stapled
German
English
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
1
6-64
See chapter 7.1.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Technical data
Table 6-24
Technical data of SIM serial interface module
Serial interface
25-pin subminiature plug connector
Transmission speed
2400 to 9600 baud
Procedure
3964R, SINEC L1, Lauf and
SINUMERIK protocol
Line length (typ. max)
1000 m (shielded) TTY
1000 m ((shielded)
hi ld d) RS 422
30 m (shielded) V.24
Software functions
Commands
Programming
Digital inputs
Number
Galvanic isolation
Input voltage
For logical “0”
For logical “1”
Delay time
Digital outputs
Number
Galvanic isolation
Read MDS, write, initialize, scan DI/DO,
Next
Depends on computer, PC or PLC of
other manufacturer. 3964R driver with
interface to MS-C available for PC.
3964R driver also available for Windows
95 and Windows NT.
Via 25-pin sub D plug connector
2
No
–2 to +5 V
+12 to +33 V (Ri = 10 kΩ)
< 10 msec
Via 25-pin sub D plug connector
2
No
(internal voltage supply) short-circuit
proof
Imax = 200 mA (per DO; or for 2 DO)
Inductive interface to MDS
(integrated SLG)
Read/write distance between SLG - MDS
Transmission frequency
S Power
S Data
Supply voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption (max.)
Permissible shock stress
Protection rating in acc. w. IEC 529
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight (approx.)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Max. of 40 mm, see field data
134 kHz
1.81 MHz
Via 25-pin sub D plug connector
24 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
220 mA (DO not loaded)
30 g
IP54 (with special plug connector)
0° to +60° C
–20° to +70° C
75 x 75 x 40
0.3 kg
6-65
Interfaces
Field data of SIM
All technical data listed here are typical data and apply to a room temperature of 25° C, a supply voltage of 24 V and a metal-free environment.
Tolerances of + 20% are permitted for special production conditions or temperatures.
Table 6-25
Field data of SIM
MDS 506
MDS 514
MDS 439 E
Length of transmission window in mm (L)
L
2L
L
2L
L
2L
60
80
85
100
75
100
Width of transmission window in mm (W)
20
30
30
Operating distance in mm (Sa)
0 to 20
0 to 25
0 to 25
40
33
Limit distance in mm (Sg)
33
Distance from MDS to MDS in mm (D1)
>200
Minimum distance
from SIM to SIM
!
Metal-free space
>300
>300
D > 700 mm
Caution
Adherence to the value specified here is essential. If this value is underranged, there is a danger that the inductive fields will be affected. The time
for the data transmission would be increased by an incalculable amount of
time or a command would be terminate with errors.
SIM can be mounted on metal without adversely affecting its range.
Metal
Metal-free
a
Flush installation in metal requires a metal-free space of a = 30 mm.
Figure 6-50
6-66
Flush installation of SIM in metal
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Transmission
window
2L
ÜL
Sg
Sa
MDS
View of side
2L
L
View of top
Transmission window in metal-free surroundings
Transmission window for Sa
Figure 6-51
Transmission window of SIM
Dimensions
(in mm)
40
21
6
47
75
4
7.7
75
65
75
5
5
Figure 6-52
5.5
Housing color: Gray
Housing material: Polyamide 12
Dimensions of SIM serial interface module
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-67
Interfaces
Plug connector
assignment
The 25-pin subminiature D plug connector is used for the following purposes.
S Voltage supply of SIM
S Connection to PC/computer
S Parameterization of SIM
Table 6-26
Overview of plug connector assignment for SIM
Meaning
Pin
Pins 1 to 8 Connection of SIM to a computer or PC
Interface (depends on type)
1
SIM 41 → V.24 (RS 232)
SIM 42 → RS 422 (V.11)
SIM 43 → TTY (only passive)
1
–
R * (terminal resistance)
+ EM (receiving)
2
TxD (Transmit Data)
E + (receiving)
– EM (receiving)
3
RxD (Receive Data)
D + (sending)
+ SE (sending)
4
–
R – (terminal resistance)
– SE (sending)
5
–
D – (sending)
–1
6
Not used
Not used
Not used
7
GND (signal ground)
E – (receiving)
–
8
Plug housing shield
Plug housing shield
Plug housing shield
9
10
11
12
DI0
DI1
DO0
DO1
13
+ 24 V
14
0 V (ground)
15
Not used
16
Not used
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
S ground:
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
Two digital inputs and outputs each
(e.g., for data carrier control)
Voltage supply of SIM (20 V to 30 V)
Cable length between the power supply unit and the SIM: max. 3 m
0 V for plug connector pins 18 to 25
For setting:
− Baud rate
– SINEC L1 address
– Transmission procedure
– Type of MDS control
SIM 43 with TTY: Pin 5 of the connection plug may not be wired.
6-68
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
Parameterization
of pins 17 to 25
Plug pin*)
Meaning
24
25
1
1
No data memory control. Presence check is switched off. The DI/DO can be programmed as
desired with the system command.
1
0
Presence check by firmware of SIM
DIs can be used as desired. They can be scanned with the DI/DO command.
0
1
Presence check via DI0 and DI1, whereby
DI0 = 1 → MDS entering
DI1 = 1 → MDS leaving
0
0
Presence check via DI1, whereby
DI1 = 1 → MDS leaving
DI0 is free and can be scanned with the status command.
Plug pin*)
Meaning
18
19
20
21
22
23
a
a
a
a
0
0
SINEC L1
aaaa = Address of SIM on the SiNEC L1 bus
(SIM is always the slave.)
Pin *) 21 20 19 18
Address allocation:
1
1
:
0
1
1
:
0
1
1
:
0
1
0
:
0
b
b
0
0
1
0
Lauf procedur
1
0
0
1
1
0
STG connection
b
b
b
b
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
3694R: SIM = Slave
3694R: SIM = Master
b
b
a
a
0
1
SINUMERIK 850/880-protocol (without reaction telegram)
Pin *)
20
21
SIM-Address (=a a)
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
2
3
SINEC-Address
1
2
:
16
(always present)
Caution:
When SINUMERIK is used, a kind of presence check must be switched on with
switches 7 and 8.
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
*) no jumper
Jumper to pin 17
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Baud rate
9600 Baud
4800 Baud
2400 Baud
(Reserved)
(= bb) (Applies to Lauf, 3964R and SINUMERIK procedures)
→ log. “1”
→ log. “0”
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-69
Interfaces
6-70
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Accessories
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7
7-1
Accessories
7.1
MOBY Software
Starting with version 3.0, the “MOBY Software” product will be delivered on
CD. All function blocks and drivers for the MOBY identification system are
included. The “Les_mich” (i.e., read_me) file in the main directory of the
CD gives a brief explanation of the programs listed below.
S FB 230: Function block for ASM 401; filehandler for SIMATIC S5
S FB 240: Function block for ASM 450; MOBY on PROFIBUS DP with
SIMATIC S5 (including master device file for PROFIBUS DP)
S FB 250: Function block for ASM 400
S FB 41 contains a function block for the ASM 410. The call interface of
this function block is almost identical to that of FB 250.
See the description of FB 250 for programming.
S FC 44 permits the ASM 450 to be used in a SIMATIC S7 environment.
Be sure to read the “Read_me” file in the FC 44 directory carefully.
S FC 45: S7 function for ASM 452/454/473/475
S FC 46 for ASM 452 (filehandler mode). The block can be used on the
S7-300 and S7-400.
S FB 246 for ASM 452 (filehandler mode). The block can be used on the
S5-115U with IM 308-C.
S Function FC 47 for ASM 470
S FB 47 contains a function block for the SIMATIC S5-115U to 155U. It
permits the ASM 470 to be used in a SIMATIC S5 environment with an
ET 200M.
S FC 56 for ASM 452, ASM 473, ASM 475 in filehandler mode. FC 56 has
the same functions as FC 46, but offers a new, trend-setting interface to
the application.
S Loading program for ES 030 and a master device file for connection of
the ES 030 to PROFIBUS DP.
S Test and demonstrator programs for presenting the functions (e.g., “read
from MDS”, “write to MDS” and so on) on a PC (e.g., with DOS or
Windows). MOBY modules ASM 424 or SIM 41 are connected by a
serial interface cable to the PC (i.e., COM1 or COM2).
S Brief explanations of the individual directories in German or English.
Cf. “les_mich.txt” or “read_me.txt”.
S 3964R driver for DOS, Windows 95 and Windows NT
S Current status of the MOBY documentation in PDF format
S Tools: Includes useful programs for MOBY configuration
S S7_OM: Installation program and Object Manager for interface modules
ASM 470, ASM 475 and ASM 473
Sample projects with the appropriate FCs are not installed here.
They are located in the respective FC directories.
7-2
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Accessories
User prompting
The “Software MOBY” CD offers user-friendly prompting based on HTML.
When Start.exe is called, a screen appears with the following main items in
the upper menu bar:
S FC für S7
S FB für S5
S PC Support
S Doku
S Tools
S Demo
S News
Note
On Software MOBY or licensing
When an interface module or SIM is purchased, no software or documentation is supplied. The “Software MOBY” CD-ROM must be ordered separately. It contains all available FBs/FCs for the SIMATIC, C-libraries for
Windows 98/NT, demo programs and so on. In addition, the CD-ROM contains the complete MOBY documentation (in German, English and French)
in PDF format.
When an interface module or SIM is purchased, the percentile price of utilization of the software incl. documentation on the “Software MOBY”
CD-ROM is included. The purchaser obtains the right to make copies (copy
license) as needed by the customer-specific application or development for
the system.
In addition, the enclosed contract applies to the use of software products
against one-time payment.
Ordering data
Table 7-1
Ordering data for MOBY software
Order No.
MOBY software
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6GT2 080-2AA10
7-3
Accessories
7.2
MOBY Wide-Range Power Supply
Description
The MOBY wide-range power pack is a compact, primary-pulsed power
supply. It is designed for use on single-phase, alternating current networks
with two DC outputs (socket connector, parallel circuited).
Its robust construction features an aluminum housing which gives the finetuned system physical strength while protecting it from electromagnetic interference and providing it with optimal heat dissipation.
A built-in current limitation circuit protects the primary-pulsed power supply
against overload and ensures continuous short circuit resistance.
The integrated overvoltage protection (SIOV) which is standard protects the
connected electronics from excessively high voltage.
Figure 7-1
Ordering data
Table 7-2
MOBY wide-range power pack
Ordering data of the MOBY wide-range power pack
Order No.
Technical data
MOBY wide-range power pack,
100 to 230 V AC/24 V DC/2.2 A;
incl. counterplug for the output voltage
6GT2 494-0AA00
24 V stub line for ASM 424, ASM 454;
length: 5 m
6GT2 491-1HH50
Table 7-3
Technical data of MOBY wide-range power pack
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Input
Input voltage
Nominal value
Range
Frequency
Input current
Efficiency
Power connection
Power failure backup
Undervoltage switchoff
Overvoltage protection
7-4
100 to 230 V AC
90 to 253 V AC
50/60 Hz
0.85 to 0.45 A
w 80% at full load
2 m power line with protective
contact connector
w 10 msec
Yes
SIOV
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Accessories
Table 7-3
Technical data of MOBY wide-range power pack
Output
Nominal output voltage
Nominal output current
Residual ripple
Socket contacts
24 V DC
2.2 A
20 mVss
Up to 160 kHz
50 mVss
Greater than 160 kHz
NTC
Yes
Startup current limitation
Continuous short circuit protection
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
During operation
-20_C to +40_htC
(max. of +60_ C; see notes on
safety)
-40_ C to +80_ C
Convection
During transportation and storage
Cooling
General specifications
Dimensions of power supply incl.
mounting plate (L x W x H) in mm
Weight
Color
Mounting
205 x 80 x 60
(without connection plug)
Approx. 1000 g
Anthracite
4 M5 screws
Electromagnetic compatibility
Interference emission (EN 50 081-1)
Interference immunity (EN 50 082-2)
Class B in acc. w. EN 55 022
EN 61 000-4-2
Safety
Certifications
Electrical safety check
CE, GS
EN 60 950/VDE 0805 and
VDE 106 (part 1)
4 kV AC
I, in acc. w. EN 60 950
(VDE 0805)
IP 65, in acc. w. EN 60 529 (only
when connected)
Galvanic isolation, primary/secondary
Protection class
Protection rating
Connector
assignment
24 V output
Output 1 and 2:
Socket 1: Ground (0 V)
3
4
2
1
Socket 2: +24 V DC
Socket 3: +24 V DC
Socket 4: Ground (0 V)
Figure 7-2 Connection assignment of 24 V output
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7-5
Accessories
Dimensions
(in mm)
65
7.5
80
3
57
205
176
7.5
5
5
190
Figure 7-3 Dimensions of MOBY wide-range power pack
Notes on safety
!
7-6
Caution
Do not open the devices or modify them.
Non-adherence will invalidate CE certification and the manufacturer’s warranty. When installing the power pack, adhere to the applicable DIN/VDE
regulations of your country.The application area of the power pack is limited
to “information technology of electrical office equipment” as stated in the
standard EN 60 950/VDE 0805.
Devices may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel.
For the purposes of the safety notes on this product, qualified personnel are
those persons who are authorized to commission, ground and tag devices,
systems and electrical circuits in accordance with safety standards. The device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and technical description and only in connection with devices and components recommended by Siemens. If devices and components of other manufacturers
are used, they must be recommended or approved by Siemens.
Correct operation of the product includes proper storage, setup and mounting, and careful operator control and maintenance.
When installing, make sure that the power outlet socket can be easily
accessed.
During operation, the housing may heat up to +40° C. This is no cause for
concern. However, at an ambient temperature of more than +40° C, be sure
to cover the power pack (power pack must still receive sufficient ventilation)
so that people cannot touch the hot housing.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Accessories
7.3
MOBY STG I Hand-Held Terminal
Application areas
The STG I adds to the MOBY I identification system a powerful mobile
hand-held terminal for applications in the areas of logistics, distribution and
service. The service and test device (STG) is an indispensable aid for commissioning and testing. All MOBY I data memories can be read and writeaccessed inductively. The STG I replaces the familiar STG 4F hand-held terminal which is now only available as a replacement part.
Figure 7-4 MOBY STG I hand-held terminal
Setup and function
The STG I mobile hand-held terminal consists of a basic device
(PSION Workabout mx) and a plug-in compact read/write head. It has a housing which is protected against splashed water (IP54), an LCD monitor
screen with 240 x 100 pixels, an alphanumeric keyboard and various interfaces (for EEPROM card, charging battery, RS 232/TTL for MOBY I read
head, battery charging interface including RS 232 for the PC coupling, and so
on).
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7-7
Accessories
The included MOBY software (memory card) provides service and test functions for reading, writing, etc. of all MOBY I data memories.
S Read data from the data memory
S Write data to the data memory
S Delete entire data memory (write with filler value)
S Present and edit the data in hexadecimal or ASCII format
S Store read data in a file
S Enable/disable password protection for all write functions
S Choice of English or German as menu language
Using the optional C library as a basis, it is very easy to program your own
applications including a customized user interface for reading and writing
data memories. Various development tools are available for the PC, and a
large selection of accessories is available directly from PSION. New applications are opened up in the area of logistics and distribution (e.g., goods commissioning data can be recorded offline with the hand-held terminal or processed and forwarded to the PC/computer later).
Filehandler
functions
With MOBY I, the “FILEHANDLER” program can be called on the STG I.
This provides you with very convenient functions for handling your data.
S Format the MDS
S Set up files on the MDS
S Write files on the MDS and the hand-held terminal
S Read files on the MDS and the hand-held terminal
S Read and display the directory of the MDS or hand-held terminal
S Delete files from the MDS and the hand-held terminal
Optional
components
See http://www.psion.com/industrial/ on the Internet.
S 3link adapter cable to the PC for easy exchange of data between PC and
PSION Workabout mx
S PSION Workabout mx basic device with large function keys and numeric
keyboard
S Additional memory card with up to 8 Mbytes of memory
S Docking station including high-speed charging device and software for
convenient data exchange between PSION Workabout mx and PC
7-8
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Accessories
System
prerequisites for
customer-specific
applications
The following prerequisites must be met when the library for SIBO ‘C’
(SIBO ‘C’ is the C developmental environment for the PSION Workabout) is
used.
S PC
The C development package for the PSION Workabout
must be installed on the PC. This development package
is available directly from PSION.
See: http://www.psion.com/industrial/.
S Hand-held
The PSION Workabout with wall bracket and power
pack. Use of the STG I MOBY hand-held terminal is
recommended.
S PC cable
You will need a 3link adapter cable from PSION for the
connection to the PC.
See: http://www.psion.com/industrial/. The cable is only
required if not already included with the C development
package.
S C library
The following files are required for MOBY
programming.
terminal
– Normal addressing
MOBY_I.H
MOBY_STG.LIB
– Filehandler
FH_CMD.H
FH_STG.LIB
FH_STRUC.H
FHDEF.H
FHERR.H
FHEXTERN.H
These are supplied by Siemens with the MOBY SIBO ‘C’
library.
Note
In principle, applications can also be developed in the Basic programming
language OVAL. However, the MOBY library cannot be used.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7-9
Accessories
Hardware
The following figure shows the primary hardware interfaces which you can
use to write your own applications.
TTL interface for use of a
MOBY read head
RS 232 interface
(e.g. connection of a
MOBY I ASM, RS 232)
Graphical LCD screen
Control keys: Contrast; display illumination;
on/off; and cursor keys
Green LED (lights up when the battery is
being charged)
Additional Flash memory cards for storing
large amounts of data
Numeric input block with Enter key
ASCII keyboard, shift and special function
keys (Ctrl, )
LIF interface for connection of PC,
printer, charging function, and so on
Figure 7-5
Hardware of the MOBY STG I hand-held terminal
If you are using another type of PSION Workabout, other interfaces are also
available. A few examples are listed below.
S Infrared interface
S Numeric keyboard and function keys
7-10
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Accessories
Ordering data
Table 7-4
Ordering data of the STG I hand-held terminal
Order No.
Mobile STG I hand-held terminal
Basic device (PSION Workaboutmx)
with MOBY I read/write head, battery, standard software including STG functionality and filehandler software on EEPROM card, user’s guide, without charging station
6GT2 003-0CA00
Charging station for a mobile hand-held terminal with
230 V AC plug connector power pack
6GT2 303-1DA00
Accessories:
MOBY I read/write head, 1.81 MHz + 134 KHz without software and without description
6GT2 003-1CA00
Memory card with STG software and filehandler software for MOBY D/E/F/I/U, including user’s guide
6GT2 303-1CA00
C library for MOBY D/E/F/I/U for development of
customer-specific screen dialogs, without development
tools, including description
Technical data
6GT2 381-1AB00
Extra battery
6GT2 094-0AB00 or
2 AA batteries
(NiCd, Ni-MH, alkali)
Additional PSION components (e.g., 3link cable and
C developmental user interface)
Obtain from local dealer or
PSION.
(http://www.psion.com/
industrial/)
Table 7-5
Technical data of the STG I hand-held terminal
Hardware
Processor
NEC V30mx 27.68 MHz (80C86-compatible)
RAM memory
2 Mbytes of which approx. 1.8 Mbytes can be used as desired
ROM memory
2 Mbytes for operating system
User program
1 Mbyte (with MOBY service and test program)
Monitor screen
Graphic LCD monitor screen with 240 x 100 pixels, gray-stage
scale, backlighting can be turned on
Keyboard
Alphanumeric with 57 keys
Sound
Piezo signal encoder
Power supply
NiCd battery pack with 2 type-AA cells (850 mAh)
High-speed chargeable, automatic switch-off
Operation time
20 hours
(read head inactive, display not lighted)
4.5 hours
(read head active, display not lighted)
10 hours
(read head inactive, display lighted)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7-11
Accessories
Table 7-5
Technical data of the STG I hand-held terminal
Interfaces
LIF interface (LIF = Low Insertion Force) for battery charging
and communication with PC and printer (3link cable not included)
RS 232 and TTL interface for connection of a MOBY read
head
Security
Locking mechanism for battery and program memory
Software
Operating system
EPOC/16 multitasking, graphics support, GUI interface,
Interpreter similar to MS-DOS
File management
MS-DOS-compatible
Integrated software
MOBY service and test program, spread sheet calculation,
data base, pocket calculator, communication
MOBY STG
program
Read, write, delete MDS, read MDS-ID. Store MDS data and
charge. Menus in German or
English. Entry and presentation of data in ASCII or HEX.
MOBY filehandler
program
Read, write, set up, delete files of the MDS and hand-held
terminal; display directory; format, lock MDS, status; display
for directory and editor
Technical Data
Complete Device (Incl.
Batteries)
Read head
Dimensions
Weight
260 x 90 x 35 [mm]
Approx. 440 g
90 x 64 x 35 [mm]
Approx. 110 g
Temperature
During operation
–20° C to +60° C
During transportation and storage –25° C to +80° C
(without battery)
Relative humidity
0% to 90%, no condensation
Type of protection
IP54 (protected against splashed water)
Shock resistance
Max. fall onto concrete: 1 m
EMC
EN 55022; FCC Part 15 Low Power Transmitter
Electrostatic, RF,
EFT
IEC 801-2; IEC 801-3; IEC 801-4
Certifications
ETS 300 330 reg. no. TTJ-P-G 128/96
FCC ID: KR5 MIS–I
RF Read/Write Head
MOBY I
Maximum read/
write
i distances
di
7-12
134 kHz energy/1.81 MHz data
MDS Type
Distance in mm
401/402
403
404/514
506
439E
6
8
20
12
12
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Accessories
FCC information
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I STG I
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7-13
Accessories
7.4
Acquisition Station ES 030-K
Application area
Acquisition station ES 030-K is a microprocessor-controlled terminal for
general-purpose use in all sectors of industry. It offers several interfaces.
This station is particularly suitable for use with the MOBY I and MOBY L
identification systems and with barcodes to lessen the load of higher-level
host systems. Its modular design permits configuration of functions and design to meet the requirements of individual applications.
Features/layout
S Can be programmed as desired with PG and PC in programming language
STEP5
S Dialog or process-oriented with keys which can be assigned as desired
S Sturdy construction (IP54) for industrial environments (e.g., for control
even when operator is wearing protective gloves)
S Flexible hardware layout
S Serial interfaces (i.e., TTY, RS 485, (RS 422), and V.24) for connection to
higher-level computers, PLCs or printer with Lauf, 3964R, SINEC L1 and
PROFIBUS DP procedures
S Additional interfaces for MOBY I and MOBY L identification systems,
barcode wands, scanners and swipe readers
S Integrated function blocks for frequently used functions
S With master/slave function for SINEC L1
7-14
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Plug connector 3
Plug connector 2
PLUG-IN OPTION
1
Serial expansion interface
TTY und V.242
8 digital inputs-/
8 digital outputs
16 digital inputs2
PLUG_IN OPTION
1
Plug connector 1
OPTION
Plug connector 4
OPTION
OPTION
Accessories
LCD display
2 x 24 characters
LCD display
4 x 20 characters
Keyboard with
29 lighted keys
key-operated switch
Sealed keyboard with
30 keys, 30 LEDs
key-operated switch
Clock chip
MOBY I
SLG Interface
MOBY I filehandler
SLG Interface
MOBY L
SLG Interface
Barcode wand
PROFIBUS DP
Interface
MOBY I
SLG Interface
MOBY I filehandler
SLG Interface
MOBY L
SLG Interface
Serial Interface
TTY and X.27
8 digital inputs/
8 digital outputs2
PROFIBUS DP
Interface
Figure 7-6
1
2
Configurator of ES 030-K
Each plug-in option is a hardware module requiring one slot on the ES 030-K.
The options “serial expansion interface” and “16 digital inputs” can also be led out on plug connector 2 as a special
version.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7-15
Accessories
Ordering data
Table 7-6
Ordering data for ES 030-K
Acquisition station ES 030-K
with serial interface (TTY and X.27)
on plug connector 1
8 DI + 8 DO on plug connector 2
Display
Without display
LCD, 2 x 24 characters
LDC, 4 x 20 characters
6AW5 451- J J J J 3
0
1
2
Plug connector 3
Not used
MOBY I, MOBY E interface
8 DI + 8 DO
16 DI
MOBY I filehandler
MOBY L interface
PROFIBUS DP interface1
Serial interface (TTY, V.24)
A
C
D
E
F
L
P
S
Plug connector 4
Not used
Barcode (incl. wand)
MOBY I, MOBY E interface
MOBY I filehandler
MOBY L interface
Barcode (without wand)
PROFIBUS DP interface1
A
B
C
F
L
N
P
Keyboard
No Keyboard
Sealed Keyboard, 30 keys. 30 LEDs
Keyboard with 29 illuminated buttons
6AW5 451-8AU
Charging kit for ES 030
1
7-16
0
2
3
Alternate: Plug 4 recommended
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Accessories
Technical data
Table 7-7
Technical data of ES 030-K
Microprocessor
Clock pulse frequency
Storage capacity (basic model)
80C32
14.7 MHz
EEPROM
32 Kbytes = 16 K instruction
RAM
128 Kbytes, battery-buffered for approx.
8 years (DB1-DB120)
Command set (STEP5)
Almost same as SIMATIC 100U (e.g., logical link operations, storage operations,
load and transfer operations, time and
counting operations, comparison operations, and processing operations)
Display
2 x 24-character LCD or
4 x 20-character LCD
Digital inputs/outputs
Always included
8 DI and 8 DO, floating
Optional module
8 DI and 8 DO, floating
Optional module
16 DI, floating
S Digital input
Logical “0”: -2 to +2 V
Logical “1”: 16 to 33 V
(Ri = approx. 5 kΩ)
Common ground of all DI
S Digital output
Logical “1”: +24 V
I = 100 mA, I = 50 mA
Short-circuit proof
Common +24 V of all DO
Serial interface
(plug connector 1)
TTY or RS 485
Procedure
3964R, Lauf, SINEC L1
Speed
150 to 19200 baud
Serial interface
Interface module
(plug connector 3)
20 mA single current
Active/passive or V.24
Procedure: Lauf or 3964R
Fieldbus
PROFIBUS DP (slave) certified in acc. w.
part III of DIN 19245
Baud rate
9.6 kbaud to 1.5 Mbaud
Connection
9-pin sub D plug connector on plug connector 4 (optionally on plug connector 3)
Connectable barcode interface (max. of 2)
Reading wand, swipe reader, hand-held
laser scanner
MOBY I
Connectable SLGs (max. of 2)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
SLG 40/SLG 40-S
SLG 41/SLG 41-S/SLG 41C
SLG 42
SLG 43
SLG 44
7-17
Accessories
Table 7-7
Technical data of ES 030-K
MOBY L
Connectable SLGs (max. of 2)
SLG 52
Connection to SIMATIC S5
RS 485, V.24, TTY or SINEC L1
Keyboard
Push-button keyboard
29 illuminated push-buttons
1 key-operated switch
Sealed keyboard
30 keys, 30 LEDs
1 key-operated switch
Power connection, normal
230 V AC, +10%; 48 to 62 Hz
Grounding-type plug connector in acc. w.
DIN 49441
Optional
24 V DC (20 to 30 V)
Current consumption
Approx. 20 VA
RAM/clock backup
Backup battery for approx. 8 years
Interference suppression
Interference class B in acc. w. VDE 0871
Protection rating
IP54
Ambient temperature
7-18
Operation
0° to +40° C
Transportation and storage
–40° to +70° C
Relative humidity
Up to 95%
Housing
Die-cast zinc
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
180 x 280 x 95
Weight (approx.)
5 kg
Silicone free
Yes
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Accessories
ES 030-K
ES 030-K
Basic model with 8 DI/DO and
serial interface, without display
and without keyboard (e.g., to
address a switch)
Basic model with 8 DI/DO and
serial interface, with LCD indication and sealed keyboard and
MOBY I or MOBY L for quality
data
Serial interface/RS 422
Serial
interface
TTY
MDS
SIMATIC S5/CP 544
MDS
A0.1
MDS
SLG
SLG
SLG
ES 030-K
ES 303-K (only slave)
SIMATIC S5/S7
PC
(master)
PLC
(master)
D
Ex:
station 11
P
PROFIBUS DP
Serial connection for barcode
scanner
L1
Station
120
DI/DO
Type 2
Station
14
Serial connection for barcode
scanner
Manual input
Type 3
L1
L1
DI/DO
Manual input
ES 030-K
ES 030-K
Basic model with 8 DI/DO and
serial interface, with LCD indication and push-buttons or
sealed keyboard
Basic model with serial interface (L1), with LCD, sealed
keyboard, barcode wand
L1
MOBY I
interface
Serial interface PC/PLC
A0.1
E0.0
MDS
TTY/RS485
A0.0
1234567
SLG
Barcode
Figure 7-7
Sample configuration of ES 030-K
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7-19
Accessories
7-20
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Documentation
A
Starting 10.01.2004, the technical documentation of MOBY is only available
electronically on the “Software MOBY” CD with the order number
6GT2 080-2AA10.
Technical
descriptions
S Description ASM 400/401 (German/English)
S Description ASM 410 (German/English)
S Description ASM 450/FC 44 (German/English/French)
S Description FC 45 (German/English/French)
S Description ASM 451/FC 46 (German/English)
S Description FC 56 (German/English)
S Description FB 246 (German)
S Description ASM 470/FC 47 for SIMATIC S7 (German/English)
S Description ASM470/FB 47 for SIMATIC S5 (German/English)
S Description SIM (for SIM 4x) (German/English)
S Description FB 230 (German/English)
S Description FB 240 (German/English)
S Description FB 250 for ASM 400/401 (German/English)
S Description 3964 R for Win 95/NT (German/English)
S Description T3964R for DOS (German/English)
S Description MOBY API (German/English)
S Description MDS 439 E (German/English)
Operator control
guides
S Operator control guide for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/
German) (also included with STG I)
S Programming instructions for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/
German)
Manuals
S Configuration manual SLG 44/MDS 507/MDS 407 E (German/English)
S Equipment manual for ES 030-K (German/English)
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
A-1
Documentation
A-2
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B
Error Messages
This appendix contains a list of MOBY I error messages. These messages are
divided into three groups.
B.1
Error numbers 01 hex to 1F hex are described in the first section.
These messages are the same for all interfaces which use direct MDS
addressing.
B.2
Some function blocks (e.g., FB 250, FB 240, FC 45 and FC 47) provide additional messages on the status of the hardware. These special
messages are described in this section.
B.3
All filehandler messages are grouped in the third section. These messages apply to ASM 401 with FB 230 as well as ASM 452, ASM 473
and ASM 475 with FC 46, FC 56.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B-1
Error Messages
B.1
General Errors
The following error codes can occur during MOBY I operation. They are
transferred in the status byte during telegram communication or via the red
LED on the front plate. On most ASM modules, this LED always indicates
the last error even when this error has already been corrected.
On ASM 450, ASM 452, the error codes can also be optionally reported via
PROFIBUS as device-related diagnoses.
FC 45 images this error code with the “error_MOBY” variable.
B-2
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Error Messages
Table B-1
General errors
Error
Code in
Hex
LED
Cause/Remedy
00
00
No error. Result is okay.
–
01
See error code 0F.
01
02
Presence error. MDS has moved out of the transmission window of the SLG. The
MOBY command could only be executed partially.
Read command:
No data are supplied to the computer.
Write command:
The data memory which just left the field contains an
incomplete data record.
SIN1
0000
0003
–> Sa (operating distance from SLG to MDS) not adhered to
–> Configuration error: Data block to be processed is too large (during dynamic
operation).
The next command (READ, WRITE or NEXT) is automatically related to the next
MDS.
Remark:
The red error LED on the front plate shows error code 02.
02
02
Presence error
0005
–> A mobile data memory has passed by the SLG and was not processed with a
command or concluded with the NEXT command.
–> An INIT command was aborted with RESET.
This error message cannot be transferred until the next command (read, write, status,
RESET, DI/DO or NEXT). The command is not executed but causes this error message. The ASM executes the next command correctly again.
Error 02 is reported immediately via external diagnosis.
Remark:
The red error LED does not distinguish between errors 01 and 02. See error code
01.
03
03
Error in the connection to the SLG
0040
–>
–>
–>
–>
Supply voltage of ASM < 20 V or not connected
24 V voltage has voltage drops.
Fuse on ASM has triggered. Check wiring.
Cable between ASM and SLG is wired incorrectly or a cable break has
occurred.
–> Hardware defect (ASM or SLG)
–> Another SLG in the vicinity is active.
–> Interference on SLG cable or bus cable
04
04
Error in memory of the MDS
0041
The data memory has never been write-accessed or has lost its contents due to a
battery failure.
–>
–>
–>
–>
–>
05
05
Initialize data memory with STG.
With ASM: Call initialization command.
Check battery of MDS or replace MDS (battery bit).
Data memory is defective.
Initialization was performed with wrong memory size.
Unknown command code in byte 2 of the telegram
MDS reports address error. Check telegram.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
0002/
0004
B-3
Error Messages
Table B-1
General errors
Error
Code in
Hex
LED
06
06
Cause/Remedy
Field interference on SLG
SIN1
0044
The SLG is receiving interference pulses from its surroundings.
–> External interference field. The interference field can be located with the
inductive field indicator of the STG:
–> The distance between two SLGs is too short and does not correspond to
configuration guidelines.
–> The connection cable to the SLG has malfunctioned, is too long or does not
meet specifications.
07
07
Too many sending errors
0045
The MDS could not receive the command or the write data from the SLG correctly
even after several attempts.
–> The MDS is located in the boundary area of the transmission window.
–> The data transmission to the MDS is being affected by external interference.
08
08
CRC sending error
0044
– The monitoring circuit has detected an error during sending.
–> Cause same as error 06
– The MDS reports CRC errors very frequently.
–> The MDS is located in the boundary area of the SLG.
–> The MDS and/or the SLG have a hardware defect.
09
09
Only for initialization. CRC error during acknowledgment receipt from MDS
–
–> Cause same as error 06
0A
10
Only for initialization. MDS cannot execute INIT command.
–
–> MDS is defective.
0B
11
Only for initialization. Timeout while initializing the MDS
–
–> MDS is located exactly on the boundary of the transmission window.
–> The MDS is using too much current (i.e., defective).
–> Only for MDS 507. MDS 507 operation was not enabled with the
“RESET with parameter transfer” command.
0C
12
Memory of the MDS can no longer be written.
0046
–> Memory of MDS is defective.
–> EEPROM–type MDS was write-accessed too often and has reached the end
of its life.
–> An incorrect end address was parameterized for the INIT command.
0D
13
Address error (address area exceeded)
–> Specified address does not exist on the MDS.
–> Check and correct the command for telegram layout.
–> The status byte is not 00 for the command.
0E
14
ECC error
The data could not be read from the MDS.
0002/
0004
0047
–> MDS data have been lost (i.e., MDS defective).
–> The MDS was not initialized with the ECC driver.
–> Initialize MDS.
–> MDS with EEPROM has reached the end of its life. The data have been lost.
–> Replace MDS.
–> The MDS moved out of the field during a write-access.
–> The MDS is not positioned correctly.
–> Command to ASM was issued incorrectly by the user.
B-4
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Error Messages
Table B-1
General errors
Error
Code in
Hex
LED
0F
01
Cause/Remedy
SIN1
Startup message
The ASM always sends this message after every startup. A startup is considered
performed after operational voltage is applied, after the front switch is activated,
after a reset via plug connector X1 or after a bus error. The startup message is retained until the user issues a RESET command to the ASM. This enables the user to
recognize when voltage returns to the ASM (i.e., readiness for operation).
10
16
NEXT command is not possible or is not permitted.
1043
–> ASM is operating without the presence check.
–> ASM has already received a NEXT command.
11
17
Short circuit or overload of the 24 V outputs
Next command must be a RESET command.
–> The affected output is switched off.
–> All 24 V outputs are switched off when a total overload occurs.
–> A reset can only be performed by turning the supply voltage off and on
again.
12
18
Internal ASM communication error
The connection to the MOBY processor has malfunctioned. Next command must be
a RESET command.
–> Hardware of ASM is defective.
–> EMC interference
14
20
Internal ASM error
Stack overflow. Next command must be a RESET command.
–> Turn 24 V supply off and on again.
15
21
Erroneous operational parameterization
–> Check switch on ASM.
16
22
The command cannot be executed with the current bus configuration.
–> Input or output areas are too small for the telegram length used.
–> Read or write command with excessive length used
–> Adjust bus configuration of the master module.
17
23
Handshake error
Next command must be a RESET command.
–> The user set an incorrect bit in the command byte of the telegram during the
handshake procedure.
–> Check user program and correct.
18
24
Only RESET command permitted
–> An error has occurred which must be acknowledged with a RESET
command. Cause may be a brief short circuit on PROFIBUS.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B-5
Error Messages
Table B-1
General errors
Error
Code in
Hex
LED
19
25
Cause/Remedy
Previous command is active.
SIN1
0042
A new command was issued to the ASM although the last command is still active.
–> An active command can only be terminated with a RESET command.
–> The new command is concluded with error 19 hex. The old command is
executed by the ASM, and the finished message is reported after completion.
1A
26
PROFIBUS DP error has occurred.
–> Bus connection has been interrupted (e.g., wire break or plug pulled).
–> Master no longer addresses the ASM.
–> The error is reported as soon as the bus connection is restored again.
1E
30
– The telegram does not have the correct format.
– AB byte does not correspond to the user data length.
–> Check and correct the telegrams in the user program.
–
1F
31
Communication with the MDS was terminated with a RESET. This error can only be
reported back with a RESET command.
–
20 (binary
xx1x xxxx)
32
Not an error message
40 (binary
x1xx xxxx)
64
80 (binary
1xxx xxxx)
128
0052 2
Only occurs when working with the ECC driver enabled. It indicates that the driver
recognized and corrected a 1-bit error. The read/write data are okay.
0051 2
Not an error message
This bit is normally always set. It is reserved for the status indication of a 2nd battery on the MDS.
0050 2
Not an error message
Battery voltage of the MDS has fallen below the threshold value. Immediate replacement of the MDS is recommended.
This status bit is always set for EEPROM-type MDSs.
When SINUMERIK is involved, the battery message is provided in IDENTIFICATION without the “F“ ID. To detect poor battery stats, the “fnr” field can be evaluated at one location for the entire system.
1
2
SIN = Equivalent error number for SIM in SINUMERIK operating mode
When several states occur at the same time, the following sequence applies: 0052, 0050 and 0051.
B-6
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Error Messages
B.2
ASM-Related Errors
B.2.1
ASM 400 with FB 250
The messages shown in table B-2 are indicated in data word 5 of FBDB.
Table B-2
Error messags of FB 250
Error Message
Bit 1 = “1”:
Synchronization error
Cause/Remedy
S FB 250 has received the result for a command which is not located in ZUWDB
(i.e., not at this location). The pointer (ZUW) to ZUWDB may have been
changed while a command was active.
S EMC effects have caused the ASM to execute another command than programmed by the user.
–> Check the entire SIMATIC system. Check the grounding concept.
Bit 2 = “1”:
FB 250 is synchronized
(SYNCH)
General communication capability with a channel module of the ASM 400 module.
This bit is set after a positive check of the FB parameterization.
This takes place during the 1st RESET immediately after bootstrap loading of the
programs and data blocks. When a RESET command does not function, the bit is
not set or reset.
ASM 400 module cannot be addressed by the FB.
S Wrong address set on the ASM 400
S ASM 400 is defective.
–> A RESET must always be performed after the sync bit is reset.
Bit 4 = “1”:
Parameterization error
S The “ADR” parameter does not contain the correct values.
S The “KAN” parameter is specified incorrectly. Permitted values are 1 or 2.
S The “TYP” parameter was specified incorrectly. Permitted values are 0, 1, 3, 5,
and 6.
S The “ANW” parameter is not “0” or “1”.
S The command is not permitted in ZUWDB.
Bit 5 = “1”:
ASM error
S The exact ASM error is located in bits 8 to 15 of ANZ.
If bits 8 to 15 = 0:
S The FB did not receive an acknowledgment from the ASM in time after command transfer.
S FB 250 was not called by the user within 4 seconds after command start (no cyclic FB call).
S The user changed data in the FBDB (DW 0 to DW 24) – particularly DW 0/1.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B-7
Error Messages
Table B-2
Error messags of FB 250
Error Message
Cause/Remedy
Bit 6 = “1”:
Loop counter monitor in FB 250 has been triggered.
Time error
S The command data could not be or could not be completely transferred to the
ASM 400.
S The ASM 400 cannot be addressed by the FB. The “ADR” parameter may not
correspond to switch setting S3 on the ASM 400.
S Length = 0 was transferred with a write command.
S The “AG” parameter is set incorrectly.
S The user has changed data in FBDB (particularly DW 0/1).
–> Check ASM 400 hardware, addressing parameterization and user program.
Bit 7 = “1”:
The command to the ASM 400 was repeated.
Repetition error
S Error in BEST = 0
The command was not concluded correctly after command repetition (not an
error).
S Error in BEST = 1
Communication malfunction between ASM and FB 250. Despite command
repetition, the command still could not be executed correctly.
When the repetition bit is set sporadically, all hardware must be checked. Special
attention should be paid to the grounding concept.
Bits 8 to 12
Error message as shown in table B-1
Bit 13 = “1”
ECC offset was performed.
Bit 14 = “1”
Dialog battery of MDS 507 has dropped below threshold value.
Bit 15 = “1”
RAM battery has dropped below threshold value.
B-8
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Error Messages
B.2.2
ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47
The indication word for FC 47 is DBB 6/7.
The indication word for FB 47 is DW 3.
S MOBY errors are indicated in DBB 6 or DL 3. Cf. table B-1.
S Internal errors of the function block are indicated in DBB 7 or DR 3. Cf.
table B-3. The red LED does not flash for these error messages from
FB 47/FC 47. The contents of the byte are specified in hexadecimal format (i.e., HEX) and as fixed point numbers (i.e., DEC).
Table B-3
Error messages of FB 47/FC 47
ANZ
(RightHand
Byte)
Description
02 HEX/
Illegal command code or command parameter was entered.
02 DEC
S Parameterize data words in BEDB correctly in accordance with the command description.
06 HEX/
The command code and the received acknowledgment code are not identical.
06 DEC
S ASM 470 not parameterized correctly
S Internal processing error
S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
07 HEX/
Synchronization error during execution of FB 47/FC 47
07 DEC
S Internal processing error
S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
08 HEX/
08 DEC
The parameterized user data length of the read/write command and the user data length received in the
acknowledgment are not identical.
09 HEX/
The received or written user data are too long.
09 DEC
S ASM 470 not parameterized correctly
S Read command: The length specified for the data to be read is too long. Maximum of 12 bytes is
S ASM 470 not parameterized correctly
S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
permitted.
10 HEX/
Read or written user data length too short. User data length is 0 bytes.
10 DEC
S Internal processing error
S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
17 HEX/
The formal operands of FB 47/FC 47 were parameterized incorrectly.
17 DEC
S Parameterize FB 47/FC 47 correctly.
S Then start RESET command.
19 HEX/
FB 47/FC 47 reports that only a RESET command is permitted as the next command.
19 DEC
S No RESET was performed after a startup message of the ASM 470.
S No RESET was performed after an error message after which a
RESET must be the next command.
S Start RESET command.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B-9
Error Messages
Table B-3
Error messages of FB 47/FC 47
ANZ
(RightHand
Byte)
Description
20 HEX/
Synchronization error between ASM 470 and FB 47/FC 47
20 DEC
S The handshake of the command and acknowledgment telegrams is out of step. There may be a contact problem or the supply voltage may be unstable.
S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
S Start RESET command.
21 HEX/
ASM 470 has performed a startup.
21 DEC
S
S
S
S
S
1B HEX/
27 DEC1
There may be a problem with the plug-in contact of the ASM 470 in the S7-300.
Supply voltage of the ASM 470 is unstable.
Interference pulse
DEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
Start RESET command.
S The data field (i.e., number of user data bytes) between DAT-Z and the end of DATDB is less than
the length given in the write command (DR 4 in BEDB). Exception: DATDB consists of 256 data
words (DW 0 to DW 255).
S DAT-Z must be adjusted to the user data length. Make DAT-Z smaller.
S Reduce length of read/write data.
S Start RESET command.
1
Can only occur with FB 47
B-10
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Error Messages
B.2.3
ASM 450 with FB 240
The error indications (ANZ) of FB 240 are located in data word DW 2 of the
BEDB.
S The MOBY errors listed in table B-1 are located in the left-hand byte of
the data word (DL 2).
S Internal FB errors are located in the right-hand byte of the data word
(DR 2). The red LED does not flash for these FB 240 error messages.
The contents of the byte are specified in binary format, in hexadecimal
format (H) and as fixed point numbers (D).
Table B-4
Error messages of FB 240
ANZ (RightHand Byte)
Description
00000010
(02H/02D)
Illegal command code or command parameter was entered.
00000110
(06H/06D)
The command code and the received acknowledgment code are not identical.
00000111
(07H/07D)
The received acknowledgment is too long.
00001000
(08H/08D)
The parameterized length of the user data of the read/write command and the user data length received in the acknowledgment are not identical.
S Parameterize data words in BEDB correctly as specified in the command description.
S Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small.
S Parameterize master module correctly.
S Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small (check GSD file).
S Read command: The length of the data to be read is too long.
S Parameterize master module correctly.
S Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small.
S Parameterize master module correctly.
00001001
(09H/09D)
The length of the received user data is too long.
00010001
(11H/17D)
The formal operands of FB 240 were parameterized incorrectly or the parameterization in the
EPROM of IM 308-B is wrong.
S Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small (check GSD file).
S Read command: The length of the data to be read is too long.
S Parameterize master module correctly.
S Parameterize FB 240 correctly.
S Parameterize master module correctly. Check the “ADR” parameter in particular.
S Then start RESET command.
00010011
(13H/19D)
FB 240 reports that only a RESET is permitted as the next command.
S No RESET was performed after a startup message of the ASM 450.
S No RESET was performed after an error message which requires a RESET as the next command.
S Start RESET command.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B-11
Error Messages
Table B-4
Error messages of FB 240
ANZ (RightHand Byte)
00010100
(14H/20D)
Description
Synchronization error between ASM 450 and FB 240
S The handshake of the command and acknowledgment telegrams is out of step. There may be a
contact problem or the supply voltage may be unstable.
S Start RESET command.
00010101
(15H/21D)
B-12
The ASM 450 has performed a startup or a PROFIBUS DP bus error has occurred.
S
S
S
S
S
Possible problem with the ASM 450’s plug-in contacts in the module rack
Supply voltage of the ASM 450 is unstable.
Interference pulse on the reset input of base connector X1
PROFIBUS DP error occurred (e.g., bus connection interrupted)
Start RESET command.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Error Messages
B.2.4
Error Indication with FC 45
FC 45 shows the error codes in 3 variables.
Table B-5
S error_MOBY:
MOBY error in acc. w. table B-1
S error_FC:
Errors generated by FC 45 due to wrong
parameterization (cf. table B-5)
S error_BUS:
Errors reported by system functions SFC 58/59
(cf. table B-6)
Error variable error_FC
Description
error_FC
(B#8#..)
00
No error. Standard value if everything’s okay.
01
SIMATIC does not have Params_DB.
02
Params_DB is too small.
⇒
UDT 10/11 was not used for the definition.
⇒
Params_DB must be 300 bytes long (for each channel).
⇒
Check Params_DB and Params_ADDR for correctness.
03
SIMATIC does not have the DB after the “command_DB_number” pointer.
04
The “command_DB” on SIMATIC is too small.
⇒
UDT 20/21 was not used for the command definition.
⇒
The last command in “command_DB” is a chained command. Reset the chaining bit.
05
Invalid command type
06
The acknowledgment received is not the acknowledgment expected. The parameters of command
and acknowledgment telegram do not match (command, length, address_MDS).
⇒
The user changed the “command_DB_number/command_DB_address” pointer while the
command was being processed.
⇒
The user changed the command parameters in data block MOBY CMD (UDT 20) while the
command was being processed.
07
The MOBY_mode parameter (defined in UDT 10) has an illegal value.
08
A bus error is reported by system functions SFC 58/59. Variable
error_Bus contains more information on the error.
09
The ASM failed.
⇒
Power failure on the MOBY-ASM
⇒
PROFIBUS plug pulled or PROFIBUS cable disconnected
The error is indicated when the ASM_Failure bit was set in OB 122. OB 122 is called when FC 45 is
no longer able to access the cyclic word for the MOBY-ASM.
0A
While the init_run command was being executed, the user started another init_run command without
waiting for “ready.”
⇒
Do not set init_run cyclically.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B-13
Error Messages
Table B-5
Error variable error_FC
error_FC
(B#8#..)
Description
0B
Init_run cannot be executed. Cyclic process image to the ASM is faulty. FC 45 reports timeout of PII.
(This error can be eliminated by writing #00 to address DBB 58 in UDT 10. However, in certain
error situations, FC 45 won’t generate an error message and will ”hang up.”)
0C
Table B-6
⇒
ASM_address in UDT 10 is parameterized incorrectly. ASM_address may be pointing to a
wrong module.
⇒
ASM hardware/firmware is faulty.
Area length error. Error_BUS contains the error 8x22 or 8x23.
⇒
DAT_DB doesn’t exist or is parameterized too small. Check DAT_DB_number and
DAT_DB_address in UDT 20.
⇒
Perform init_run.
Error variable error_Bus
Description
Error Code
(W#16#...)
800A
ASM is not ready. Temporary message.
⇒
This message is received by the user who is not using FC 45 and who is polling the ASM noncyclically very quickly in succession.
8x7F
Internal error in parameter x. Cannot be corrected by the user.
8x22
8x23
Area length error while reading a parameter
Area length error while writing a parameter
This error code indicates that parameter x is completely or partially outside the operand range or the
length of a bit field of an ANY parameter is not divisible by 8.
8x24
8x25
Area error while reading a parameter
Area error while writing a parameter
This error code indicates that parameter x is located in an area which is illegal for the system function.
8x26
The parameter contains a number of a time cell which is too large.
8x27
The parameter contains a number of a counter cell which is too large.
8x28
8x29
Orientation error while reading a parameter
Orientation error while writing a parameter
The reference to parameter x is an operand whose bit address is not 0.
8x30
8x31
The parameter is located in the write-protected global DB.
The parameter is located in the write-protected instance DB.
8x32
8x34
8x35
The parameter has a DB number which is too large.
The parameter has an FC number which is too large.
The parameter has an FB number which is too large.
8x3A
8x3C
8x3E
The parameter has the number of a DB which is not loaded.
The parameter has the number of an FC which is not loaded.
The parameter has the number of an FB which is not loaded.
B-14
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Error Messages
Table B-6
Error variable error_Bus
Error Code
(W#16#...)
8x42
8x43
Description
An access error occurred while the system was trying to read a parameter from the I/O area of the
inputs.
An access error occurred while the system was trying to write a parameter to the I/O area of the outputs.
8x44
8x45
Error during nth (n>1) read access after an error occurred
Error during nth (n>1) write access after an error occurred
8090
Specified logical base address is invalid. No assignment exists in SDB1/SDB2x or it isn’t a base
address.
8092
A type other than BYTE is specified in ANY reference.
8093
The area identifier contained in the configuration (SDB1, SDB2x) of the logical address is not permitted for these SFCs. Permitted:
0 = S7-400
1 = S7-300
2.7 = DP modules
80A0
Negative acknowledgment while reading from the module (module removed during the read procedure or module is defective)
80A1
Negative acknowledgment while writing to the module (module removed during the write procedure
or module is defective)
80A2
DP protocol error in layer 2. Hardware may be defective.
80A3
DP protocol error in Direct-Data-Link-Mapper or User-Interface/User. Hardware may be defective.
80B0
S SFC not possible for this module type
S Module doesn’t recognize the data record.
S A data record number w241 is illegal.
S Data records 0 and 1 are not permitted for SFC58 “WR_REC.”
80B1
The length in the RECORD parameter is wrong.
80B2
Although configured, the slot is not occupied.
80B3
Actual module type is not the module type configured in SDB1.
80C0
S RD REC: The module has the data record but no read data yet.
S WR REC: ASM is not ready for new data.
⇒ Wait for the cyclic counter to be incremented.
80C1
The module has not yet processed the data of the previous write job for the same data record.
80C2
The module is currently processing the maximum number of jobs for a CPU.
80C3
Required resources (memory, etc.) not available at the moment.
80C4
Communication error
S
S
S
S
S
80C5
Parity error
SW-Ready not set
Error in block length management
Checksum error on CPU side
Checksum error on module side
Distributed I/O not available
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B-15
Error Messages
B.3
Filehandler Error Messages for ASM 401/452/473/475
These error messages are indicated by FB 230, FB 246, FC 46 and FC 56.
Table B-7
Filehandler error messages
Description
ASCII
Error Code
A0 06
The command ID (KK) of the started command is not permitted or not defined. Specify the correct
command ID.
A0 11
The telegram monitoring parameters (DBN or KK) are not being sent in the correct order. Two or
more telegrams are being written in the same page frame memory area. Parameterization of the FB
call parameters (“SSNR” and “KAN”) must be checked for all channels.
S For 1st command block: DBN (i.e., byte 8/9 in the telegram) does not have the value 0001.
S For next block: DBN of the user is not in correct ascending sequence or the KK parameter
(i.e., byte 4) does not correspond to the command just executed.
A0 15
Check byte mode is enabled. The check byte generated by FB 230 does not correspond to the
command telegram. Correction same as A0 11.
A0 16
The filehandler is executing the commands of another user (e.g., the STG, can be recognized in bit 6
(“STG active/ASM test”) of BEST). Command execution is delayed until the other user finishes.
Start command again if necessary.
B0 01
Error in connection to the SLG
S
S
S
S
Cable between ASM and SLG is incorrectly wired, or a cable break has occurred.
24 V supply voltage is not connected or has been turned off.
Fuse on the ASM 401 is defective.
Hardware defect: Channel module or SLG
This error does not occur during the start of system commands (i.e., RESET, NEXT and
ASM STATUS).
B0 02
EAKO 1:
S A command was started, but there is no MDS in the transmission window of the SLG.
EAKO 0:
S The old/current MDS has left the transmission window, and the new/next MDS has
entered the transmission window. A command was started (not NEXT). This command refers to the new MDS, but the old/current MDS has not yet been concluded
with NEXT.
S A new MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG but leaves it again without
a command being executed for this MDS (i.e., an MDS has “slipped through”).
C0 02
The MDS reports a memory error.
S Replace MDS if the battery monitoring bit is set
S Test MDS by attempting to initialize it with the STG
S Format MDS with FORMAT
B-16
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Error Messages
Table B-7
Filehandler error messages
ASCII
Error Code
C0 06
Description
During certain important procedures (e.g., write system area of the MDS or format MDS), the MDS
may not leave the transmission window of the SLG or the command will be terminated with this
error message.
S Start command again.
S MDS is located in the boundary area of the SLG transmission window.
S EAKO = 1: MDS was not located in the transmission window of the SLG when the command
was started.
C0 07
S The FORMAT or TRACE command was issued with the wrong parameters. This physical ad-
dress given in the command does not exist on the MDS. MDS memory is smaller than specified
in the command.
S READ/WRITE/UPDATE: Pointer in the FAT is faulty. It indicates a block which does not exist
on the MDS.
C0 08
Field interference on the SLG. The SLG is receiving interference from its surroundings. Some
sources are listed below.
S External field of interference. The interference field can be documented with the “inductive field
indicator” of the STG.
S The distance between two SLGs is too short and does not adhere to configuration guidelines.
S The connection cable to the SLG has malfunctioned, is too long or does not meet specifications.
C0 09
Too many sending errors have occurred. The MDS could not receive the command or the write data
from the ASM correctly even after several attempts.
S The MDS is located exactly in the boundary area of the transmission window.
S The data transmission to the MDS is being affected by external interference.
C0 10
S CRC sending error. The monitor receiving circuit has detected an error while information was
being sent. Error cause same as C0 08.
S The MDS reports CRC errors very frequently. The MDS is located in the boundary area, or the
MDS or SLG is defective.
C0 11
Same as C0 08
C0 12
The MDS is unable to perform the FORMAT command. The MDS is defective.
C0 13
While being formatted, the MDS must remain in the transmission window of the SLG. Otherwise a
timeout error will occur. This means:
S The MDS is located exactly in the boundary area of the transmission window.
S The MDS is using too much current (i.e., is defective).
S The EEPROM-MDS type is parameterized incorrectly for FORMAT.
C0 14
The memory of the MDS cannot be written. This means:
S The MDS has a smaller memory than specified in the FORMAT command (i.e., parameterize the
MDS type correctly).
S The memory of the MDS is defective.
S The EEPROM-type MDS has been write-accessed too often and has reached the end of its life.
C0 15
Address error. The address area of the MDS was exceeded.
S The MDS is not the right type.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B-17
Error Messages
Table B-7
Filehandler error messages
ASCII
Error Code
C0 16
Description
An ECC error has occurred. The data cannot be read from the MDS.
S Data of the MDS have been lost (i.e., MDS is defective).
S The MDS was not formatted with the ECC driver. Format the MDS again.
S An EEPROM-type MDS has reached the end of its life, and the data have been lost. Replace the
MDS.
S The MDS moved out of the field while being write-accessed. The MDS is not positioned cor-
rectly. Remember: The system area of the MDS is automatically written on every SLG station.
C0 17
The filehandler is not working correctly.
S Check command layout or command sequence.
S The hardware of the ASM 401 (firmware) has a defect.
D0 01
The filehandler will only accept a RESET command.
S The filehandler has not yet been initialized with a RESET command.
S This state can only be canceled with a RESET command.
D0 05
D0 07
The FORMAT, CREATE, WRITE, ATTRIB, UPDATE, COVER, QUEUE-READ or
QUEUE-WRITE commands were issued with illegal parameters.
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
FORMAT with illegal MDS name or MDS type
CREATE with illegal file name
WRITE/UPDATE with length 0 (DLNG = 0)
Illegal attribute
QUEUE-READ or QUEUE-WRITE with illegal option
COVER with illegal user (only 0 or 1 permitted)
The system data transferred with the LOAD command are incorrect.
DLNG parameterized incorrectly for LOAD
– Wrong data block specified or incorrectly parameterized
–
–
MOVE command executed incorrectly. DIR + FAT on the MDS do not correspond to the
checksum.
S The MOVE command cannot be executed. The checksum does not
correspond to DIR + FAT. The data memory probably left the transmission window while system operations (e.g., write DIR + FAT) were being executed, or the data structure of the MDS is
wrong.
D0 09
The RESET command was transferred to the filehandler with the wrong parameters.
S Check bytes 11 to 17 of the telegram
D0 14
Sufficient memory space on the MDS is no longer available. The data are
not completely written to the MDS.
CREATE command: No further data blocks can be reserved for creation of a file.
No more blocks are free.
D0 15
The filehandler was unable to identify the MDS. The MDS must be formatted again.
D0 18
The logical address specified for the address is located outside the file. The FAT contains an error.
The MDS must be formatted again.
D0 22
The data memory has been covered with the COVER command. A write command (e.g., UPDATE
and CREATE) may not be allowed to destroy the data memory layout and is thus rejected.
D0 23
COVER command:
B-18
WRITE command:
The MDS name specified in the command does not match the actual
MDS name.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Error Messages
Table B-7
Filehandler error messages
ASCII
Error Code
Description
E0 01
S The type of MDS in front of the SLG does not correspond to the set ECC mode. The MDS must
be formatted again in accordance with the desired ECC mode.
S The MDS is not a filehandler MDS. Format the MDS again.
E0 02
No more directory entries are free. The file specified with the CREATE command can no longer be
created.
E0 03
The file specified with the CREATE command already exists in the directory. Two files with the
same name are not permitted.
E0 05
S A FAT block sequence error has been determined for a READ or WRITE command. The file
allocation table (FAT) is faulty. The MDS must be formatted again.
F0 01
S Wrong address given for the TRACE command.
S The file addressed by a command (e.g., WRITE) does not exist in the directory. The file must be
set up with CREATE.
S Check file name. It may not be in ASCII format.
S One or more files are to be read with QUEUE-READ but these files do not exist on the MDS.
Valid data were not transferred to the user.
F0 05
Write-access (WRITE, UPDATE or DELETE) to a file which may not be changed (i.e., protected by
an appropriate attribute).
S Use the ATTRIB command to change the access rights, and then start the WRITE/UPDATE/
DELETE command again.
F0 06
The RWD switch on the ASM does not have sufficient rights for this command. The command was
ignored. Check the switch.
F0 07
QUEUE-READ: File length specified is shorter than the file length.
F0 08
QUEUE-READ: The skip calculated by the filehandler is greater than 0FFF hex (4095 decimal).
H1 01
The FB 230 call parameter or the DATDB/DATDW was parameterized incorrectly for the
absolute call.
Change the FB parameter in the calling program, and start a RESET command.
H1 02
S The length of the loaded BEDB is less than 50 data words (i.e., FB 230 does not have sufficient
space for the internal FB parameters). A new BEDB with the correct length must be loaded.
Then start a RESET command.
S The FB 230 for this type of PLC was not called (i.e., FB 230 for PLC 115U, FB 231 for
PLC 135U and FB 233 for PLC 155U).
S FC 56: Params_DB is too small.
H0 03
The command index is illegal. Change the command index.
H0 04
This command ID and thus this command is unknown to FB/FC. Check the command ID.
H0 05
The access rights of the corresponding SLG do not permit this command. For example, when
“R” access rights (i.e., read only) were granted to the SLG, WRITE commands cannot be executed
for this SLG. Either the “RWD” FB parameter must be changed (and then a RESET command
started to accept the change), or a legal command must be started.
H0 06
The WRITE/UPDATE/LOAD/QUEUE-WRITE or QUEUE-READ command parameter specified in
DW 9 (DLNG) of the DEDB is not permitted. Only a user data length of 7FF0 hex (32752 decimal)
is permitted or a maximum of 210 decimal bytes for QUEUE-READ. Change DLNG accordingly.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B-19
Error Messages
Table B-7
Filehandler error messages
ASCII
Error Code
Description
H1 07
The data block specified in DW 1 (BEDB) does not exist on the PLC. The applicable data block
must be loaded. Then start a RESET command so that the absolute addresses can be calculated.
H1 08
This is a pure software error which cannot occur during normal operation. A RESET command must
be started if this error does occur anyway. Two or more telegrams are written in the same page frame
memory area. This means:
S Check actual FB 230 operands, particularly SSNR” and KAN.”
S The user program contains an error.
S Check the hardware.
–
SIMATIC bus
–
ASM 401 – basic module and/or channel module
–
SIMATIC CPU
H1 09
The check byte of the acknowledgment telegram which was read and the check byte calculated by
FB 230 do not match (if check byte mode was enabled). A RESET command must be started. For
remedy, see also H1 08.
H1 10
The channel module has performed a hardware reset. This could have been caused by a voltage drop
in the device rack or a plug-in contact problem, for example. The user must start a RESET command
to parameterize the SLG again.
H1 11
The acknowledgment which was received has absolutely no connection with running operation.
This is a pure software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation. A
RESET command must be started if this error should occur anyway. For remedy, see also H1 08.
H1 12
The command ID of the command and the corresponding acknowledgment do not match. This is a
software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation. A RESET command
must be started if this error should occur anyway. For remedy, see also H1 08.
H1 13
The first command block was not acknowledged correctly (i.e., the telegram monitoring parameters
do not match). This is a pure software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal
operation. A RESET command must be started if this error should occur anyway. For remedy, see
also H1 08.
H1 14
An error was determined while reading the interface monitoring register. This means that
synchronization no longer exists between writing command blocks and reading corresponding
acknowledgments. This is usually caused by a plug-in contact problem of the channel module.
A RESET command must be started to set synchronization again. For remedy, see also H1 08.
H1 15
The pointer to the start address of the user data calculated from the DATDB and DATDW (DW 1 in
BEDB) parameters is located outside the specified data block (i.e., the pointer is too long). Either
DATDW must be shortened, or the DATDB must be lengthened. Then start a RESET command.
H1 16
The telegram monitoring parameters of the command and acknowledgment blocks do not match.
This is a pure software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation. If this
error occurs anyway, a RESET command must be started. For remedy, see H1 08.
H1 17
See error H1 16.
B-20
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Error Messages
Table B-7
Filehandler error messages
ASCII
Error Code
Description
H1 18
While a command is being executed (i.e., ready bit not yet set), the pointer to the start address of the
data calculated from DATDB and DATDW was changed, and the absolute addresses are no longer
correct. A RESET command must be started to calculate the absolute addresses again.
H1 19
The absolute address which is accessed for reading and writing the data block is located outside the
data block. Either the data block must be lengthened, or the pointer to the start address of the user
data (DATDB and DATDW) must be corrected (i.e., give the data block more space). Then start a
RESET command.
H1 20
During running operation (i.e., FB 230 is being called cyclically), the PLC memory was compressed
or the absolute location of the BEDB and/or DATDB data blocks was changed. The absolute addresses are no longer correct. A RESET command must be started.
H1 21
This message tells the user that only a RESET command is permitted as the next command. All
other commands will be rejected.
H1 22
The ASM 401 (page frame memory) cannot be accessed (only for FB 231 and PLC 135U). This is a
plug problem (i.e., hardware error) or a parameterization error (FB parameter SSNR and/or KAN).
Check switch settings, and then start a RESET command.
H0 25
QUEUE-READ: QUDBTYP or QUANZ parameter is not permitted.
H0 26
QUEUE-READ: DB or DX from the specified DB/DX area does not exist on the PLC.
H0 27
QUEUE-READ: QUDW pointer is located outside the DB or DX specified in QUDB.
H0 28
QUEUE-READ: DB or DX are missing on the PLC or are too short to read in the user data.
H1 30
FB 230 has found a system error. The acknowledgment of the filehandler or PROFIBUS DP master
is not permitted.
S
S
S
S
S
S
Contact problem of the CM 423 channel module in the ASM 401
Contact problems of the ASM 401 in the backplane bus of the S5
Static charging on the SLG cable
Configuration not grounded or poorly grounded
A RESET command must then be started.
FC 46/56: Communication blocks SFC 58/59 have reported an error. The exact cause is located
in a separate data word (FC 46 = ANZ2; FC 56 = error_BUS).
H1 31
The parameterized channel number (MOBY DB) is outside the legal area (1 to 8).
H1 32
ASM doesn’t react to startup procedure.
This error is reported when the ASM doesn’t react when the FC sets the startup bit and this makes the
handshake procedure during the RESET fail.
Error bit and ready bit are set and the command is terminated.
H1 33
Timeout for init_RUN
If the init_RUN procedure is not concluded within a parameterizable time (e.g., due to an error on the
ASM), this is reported to the user with error H1 33.
Error bit and ready bit are set and the command is terminated.
H1 34
init_RUN executed more than once
The user sets the init_RUN bit again while an init_RUN is already running without waiting for the
ready bit. The FC recognizes this and reports this error.
Error bit and ready bit are set and the command is terminated.
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B-21
Error Messages
Table B-7
Filehandler error messages
ASCII
Error Code
H1 35
Description
ASM_Fehler
When the FC ”realizes” that the ASM can no longer be addressed (reported by OB 122), the command is terminated, the error bit and ready bit are set and error H1 35 is reported. The failure can
have various causes.
–
Voltage failure on the ASM
–
Bus plug disconnected or bus cable interrupted
H1 36
S The DB of the pointer ”command_DB_number” doesn’t exist on the SIMATIC.
S The ”command_DB” on the SIMATIC is too small (minimum of 30 bytes).
H1 37
Parameter error in MOBY_mode
The MOBY_mode parameter is checked each time the FC is called. When a value larger than 0Fhex
is set, PC processing is terminated and error H1 37 is entered in the MOBY DB.
Error bit and ready bit are set.
H1 38
ANW outside permissible area (0 to 7)
H1 39
There is a gap between two consecutive acknowledgments. The telegram counter DBN indicates to
the FC that acknowledgments have been lost.
H1 40
DBN is greater than ADB.
Kx xx
QUEUE-WRITE was parameterized incorrectly (DATDB/DATDW or DLNG).
Option 0000 hex: The file entry parameterized in DATDB with the number xxx or
xxx +1 is not correct. Counting of the file entries in DATDB
starts with 1.
Option 0001 hex: The file entry parameterized in DATDB with the number xxx or
xxx +1 contains a file name which already exists on the MDS.
Counting of the file entries in DATDB starts with 1.
Note
The file entries are incremented decimally.
B-22
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
ASCII Table
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
C
C-1
ASCII Table
C-2
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
D
Compatibility
The following table provides customers and service personnel with a list of
all types of MDSs, SLGs and ASMs from the MOBY I family. These type
designators are also used on the name plates of the components. When types
have been discontinued, this table can be used to look for a suitable replacement.
Table D-1
Compatibility of MDS and SLG types (status: September 2004)
Type Designator
MDS 114
MDS 115
1
1
Description/Remarks
Replacement Type
Discontinued on 12.31.2000
Replacement type has different housing with same mounting dimensions
MDS 115 for Ex zone. No CE. Discontinued as of
01.01.96.
The MDS has no cover and is not welded.
Discontinued
MDS 213 E for Ex zone. No CE. Discontinued as of
01.01.96.
MDS 404
MDS 404
MDS 302 1
MDS 401
MDS 402
MDS 403
MDS 404
MDS 407 E 1
Replacement type has 8-KB memory.
MDS 402
MDS 413 E 1
MDS 438 E 2
Replacement type with FRAM
MDS 439 E is smaller than MDS 438 E and requires a
different mounting plate. The mounting holes are different
for the user.
MDS 439 E
Order numbers 6GT2 000-0CD30-0AB0 and
6GT2 000-0CD30-0AC0 are compatible for the user.
MDS 505 1
Greater temperature range. Temperatures up to 85° C possible.
MDS 115-ZA22 3
MDS 115-ZA24 1
MDS 213 E 1
MDS 213 E-ZA223
MDS 506
MDS 507
MDS 514
MDS 515 1
MDS 404
MDS 404
8-KB RAM/FRAM
Replacement type delivered with larger RAM memory.
The data are lost when the battery is replaced.
MDS 507
MDS 404
MDS 439 E
MDS 514
Discontinued as of 10.01.2003
Different housing with same mounting dimensions
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
MDS 514
D-1
Compatibility
Table D-1
Compatibility of MDS and SLG types (status: September 2004)
Type Designator
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
SLG 41
SLG 41-S
SLG 41C
SLG 41CC
SLG 42
SLG 42-ZA22 3
SLG 43
SLG 44 1
SLG 44-ZA28 1
SLG 44-ZA30 1
SLG 44-ZA07
SLG 44
(6GT2 001-0DA10-0AX0)
Description/Remarks
Replacement Type
Read head with diameter of M30
Read head with diameter of M18
SLG 41 with turned antenna. As of 10.01.2004 the ordering number was changed from 6GT2 001-0AA00-ZA23
to 6GT2 001-0AA00-0AX0
SLG 42 with smaller range for Ex zone. No CE. Discontinued as of 01.01.96.
Discontinued with effect from October 1, 2003
SLG 44 with wider range (1 m)
SLG 44 with adjustable receiving sensitivity
SLG 44 with adjustable range
SLG 44 with adjustable range, 100% identical with
SLG 44-ZA07 (August 2004)
SLG 44-ZA07
SLG 44-ZA07
SLG 44-ZA07
6GT2 001-0DA10-0AX0
ASM 400
ASM 401
Phased-out with effect from October 1, 2004
Phased-out with effect from October 1, 2004
ASM 410
Phased-out with effect from October 1, 2004
ASM 420
Replacement type SIM is protocol-compatible; ASM is
compatible with SLG connection.
Discontinued as of 07.01.2002. No replacement with serial
interface.
SIM/ASM 424
Successor type uses same FB 240. The GSD file is new as
well as mechanics and plug.
Replacement type is PROFIBUS DPV1and not PROFIBUS-FMS.
ASM 450
ASM 421
ASM 424
ASM 440
ASM 441
ASM 450
ASM 451 1
ASM 452
ASM 454
ASM 456
ASM 470
ASM 473 2
(6GT2 002-0HA00)
ASM 475 2
(6GT2 002-0GA00)
Discontinued with effect from July 1, 2002
Discontinued with effect from July 1, 2002
Replacement type is FC-compatible.
Discontinued with effect from July 1, 2002
Replacement type is FC-compatible.
New HW parameterization necessary.
ASM 452
ASM 456
ASM 456
ASM 456
ASM 473
(6GT2 002-0HA10)
ASM 475
(6GT2 002-0GA10)
RF170C
SIM
1
2
3
Discontinued. Replacement type is 100% compatible.
Discontinued. Replacement type is somewhat compatible.
Discontinued. No replacement type
D-2
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Index
Numbers
3RX9 802-0AA0, 6-28
3SX6 284, 5-3
6AW5 418-4F, 6-64
6AW5 451-....3, 7-16
6AW5 451-8AU, 7-16
6EP1 332-1SH12, 6-63
6ES5 491-0LB11, 6-14
6ES5 700-8MA11, 6-19
6ES5 700-8MA22, 6-19
6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0, 6-28
6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0, 6-28
6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0, 6-57
6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0, 6-46, 6-47
6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0, 6-46, 6-47
6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0, 6-47, 6-52
6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0, 6-39, 6-41
6GT2 000-0CA10, 4-4
6GT2 000-0CA20, 4-8
6GT2 000-0CD30-0AD0, 4-26
6GT2 000-0DC00-0AA0, 4-18
6GT2 000-0DC01-0AA0, 4-21
6GT2 000-0DG10, 4-24
6GT2 000-0EG00, 4-16
6GT2 000-1CF00, 4-11
6GT2 001-0AA00, 5-11
6GT2 001-0AA00-0AX0, 5-11
6GT2 001-0AC00, 5-15
6GT2 001-0AC00-0AX0, 5-15
6GT2 001-0BA00, 5-21
6GT2 001-0CA10, 5-25
6GT2 001-0DA10-0AX0, 5-29
6GT2 001-0EA10, 5-3
6GT2 001-0EB00, 5-7
6GT2 002-0AA00, 6-6
6GT2 002-0AB00, 6-6
6GT2 002-0BA00, 6-19
6GT2 002-0EB00, 6-28
6GT2 002-0EB20, 6-28
6GT2 002-0FA10, 6-47
6GT2 002-0GA10, 6-47
6GT2 002-0HA10, 6-56
6GT2 002-1AB00, 6-6
6GT2 002-2CE00, 6-39
6GT2 002-2EE00, 6-39
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6GT2 003-0CA00, 7-11
6GT2 003-1CA00, 7-11
6GT2 005-0AA10, 6-64
6GT2 005-0BA10, 6-64
6GT2 005-0CA10, 6-64
6GT2 080-2AA10, 6-6, 6-28, 6-39, 6-47, 6-56,
6-64, 7-3
6GT2 090-0A..., 3-80, 5-15, 6-32
6GT2 090-0AN50, 3-88
6GT2 090-0AT12, 3-88
6GT2 090-0AT80, 3-88
6GT2 090-0BA00, 3-83
6GT2 090-0BA10, 3-83
6GT2 090-0BB00, 6-6, 6-10
6GT2 090-0BB10, 6-6
6GT2 090-0BC00, 5-15, 6-28, 6-32, 6-56
6GT2 090-0CA10, 4-16, 4-24
6GT2 090-0PA00, 4-21
6GT2 090-0QA00, 4-26, 4-28
6GT2 090-0QB00, 4-26, 4-28
6GT2 090-0UA00, 3-83
6GT2 091-0A..., 3-84, 6-6, 6-39, 6-41
6GT2 091-0AH50, 3-87
6GT2 091-0AN10, 3-87
6GT2 091-0AN20, 3-87
6GT2 091-0AN50, 3-87
6GT2 091-0CH20, 3-88
6GT2 091-0CH50, 3-88
6GT2 091-0D..., 3-85, 6-19, 6-25
6GT2 091-0DH50, 3-87
6GT2 091-0DN10, 3-87
6GT2 091-0DN20, 3-87
6GT2 091-0E..., 3-85, 6-46, 6-47, 6-52
6GT2 091-0EH20, 3-87
6GT2 091-0EH50, 3-87
6GT2 091-0EN10, 3-87
6GT2 091-0EN20, 3-87
6GT2 091-0EN50, 3-87
6GT2 091-1CH20, 3-84, 3-88, 6-28, 6-32, 6-56
6GT2 091-1CH50, 3-88
6GT2 091-1CN10, 3-88
6GT2 091-1CN20, 3-88
6GT2 091-1CN50, 3-88
6GT2 091-2A..., 3-84
6GT2 091-2AN10, 3-87
Index-1
Index
6GT2 091-2AN50, 3-87
6GT2 091-2CH20, 3-88
6GT2 091-2D..., 3-85
6GT2 091-2DH50, 3-87
6GT2 091-2E.., 3-85
6GT2 091-2EH20, 3-87
6GT2 091-2EH50, 3-87
6GT2 091-2EN10, 3-87
6GT2 091-2EN50, 3-87
6GT2 094-0AA0, 4-21
6GT2 094-0AB00, 7-11
6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA1, 4-26
6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA2, 4-26
6GT2 303-1CA00, 7-11
6GT2 303-1DA00, 7-11
6GT2 381-1AB00, 7-11
6GT2 390-0BA00, 6-39
6GT2 390-1AB00, 6-39
6GT2 391-0B..., 3-86, 6-39, 6-41
6GT2 391-0BH50, 3-88
6GT2 391-0BN20, 3-88
6GT2 491-1HH50, 6-39, 6-41, 7-4
6GT2 494-0AA00, 3-81, 6-39, 7-4
A
Acquisition Station ES 030-K
Features/layout, 7-14
Ordering data, 7-16
Technical data, 7-17
Adapter floor plate for top-hat-rail mounting,
6-44
Amount of data, Transferred based on MDS
speed, 3-20
ASM 400
Address settings, 6-11
Function block FB 250, 6-8
Layout and function, 6-4
Ordering data, 6-6
Plug connectors and their assignment, 6-10
Settings on the channel module, 6-13
SIMATIC adapter capsule, 6-14
SIMATIC S5 Configuration, 6-14
Switches and plug-in jumpers, 6-11
Technical data, 6-7
Index-2
ASM 401
Address settings, 6-11
Function block FB 230, 6-9
Layout and function, 6-4
Ordering data, 6-6
Plug connectors and their assignment, 6-10
Settings on the channel module, 6-13
SIMATIC adapter capsule, 6-14
SIMATIC S5 Configuration, 6-14
Switches and plug-in jumpers, 6-11
Technical data, 6-7
ASM 410
Configuration in ET 100U/ET 200U, 6-21
Layout and function, 6-18
Ordering data, 6-19
Setting the operating mode, 6-23
Slots in PLC, 6-20
Technical data, 6-19
Wiring of one or two SLGs, 6-25
ASM 424
Adapter floor plate for top-hat-rail mounting, 6-44
Dimensions, 6-44
Layout and function, 6-38
Ordering data, 6-39
Pin assignment and switches, 6-42
Technical data, 6-40
ASM 450
Dimensions, 6-34
Layout and function, 6-26
Ordering data, 6-28
Pin allocation, 6-35
PROFIBUS address and terminating resistance, 6-37
PROFIBUS configuration, 6-31
SLG connection technique, 6-31
Technical data, 6-29
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Index
ASM 452
Dimensions, 6-34
Layout and function, 6-27
Operating mode, 6-31
Ordering data, 6-28
Pin allocation, 6-35
PROFIBUS address and terminating resistance, 6-37
PROFIBUS configuration, 6-31
SLG connection technique, 6-31
Technical data, 6-29
ASM 454
Adapter floor plate for top-hat-rail mounting, 6-44
Dimensions, 6-44
Layout and function, 6-38
Ordering data, 6-39
Pin assignment and switches, 6-42
Technical data, 6-40
ASM 470
Installation of the software, 6-53
Layout and function, 6-45
Ordering data, 6-47
Technical data, 6-48
Wiring to the SLG, 6-52
ASM 473
Configuration, 6-58
Dimensions, 6-62
Hardware configuration, 6-60
Layout and function, 6-55
Ordering data, 6-56
Pin assignment, 6-61
SLG connection, 6-60
Technical data, 6-56
ASM 475
Installation of the software, 6-53
Layout and function, 6-46
Ordering data, 6-47
Technical data, 6-48
Wiring to the SLG, 6-52
C
Cable, Shielding, 3-74
Cable configuration, 3-80
Cable Lengths, 3-87
Chemical resistance of the mobile data carriers,
3-33
Communication
Between ASM and User Program, 3-11
Between ASM, SLG and MDS, 3-8
Concept of shielding, 3-78
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
D
Documentation
Manuals, A-1
Operator control guides, A-1
Technical descriptions, A-1
E
EMC basic rules, 3-76
EMC guidelines, 3-62
Avoiding interference sources, 3-70
Equipotential bonding, 3-71
F
Field data, 3-15
L
LEDs for MOBY, 6-61
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP, 6-61
M
MDS 401
Definition of the field midpoints, 4-7
Dimensions, 4-5
Field data, 4-5
Mounting methods, 4-6
Mounting on metal, 4-5
Ordering data, 4-4
Technical data, 4-4
MDS 402
Definition of the field midpoints, 4-10
Dimensions, 4-9
Field data, 4-9
Ordering data, 4-8
Technical data, 4-8
MDS 403
Auxiliary lobes, 4-15
Dimensions, 4-13
Field data, 4-12
Ordering data, 4-11
Technical data, 4-11
Transmission window, 4-14
MDS 404
Dimensions, 4-17
Field data, 4-17
Ordering data, 4-16
Technical data, 4-16
Index-3
Index
MDS 439 E
Cyclic operation, 4-30
Dimensions, 4-28
Field data, 4-27
Life span, 3-61
Ordering data, 4-26
Technical data, 4-26
Temperature dependency of the transmission
window, 3-56
Temperatures during cyclic operation, 3-58
MDS 506
Dimensions, 4-19
Field data, 4-19
Ordering data, 4-18
Technical data, 4-18
MDS 507
Changing the battery, 3-48
Dead battery measurement, 3-48
Dimensions, 4-23
Field data, 4-22
Ordering data, 4-21
Technical data, 4-21
MDS 514
Dimensions, 4-25
Field data, 4-25
Ordering data, 4-24
Technical data, 4-24
Metal-free area, 3-23
Flush installation in metal, 3-24
Mounting on metal, 3-23
MOBY hand-held terminal
Filehandler functions, 7-8
Hardware, 7-10
Ordering data, 7-11
Setup and function, 7-7
System prerequisites, 7-9
Technical data, 7-11
MOBY I dialog, 3-17
MOBY wide-range power supply
Connector assignment 24 V output, 7-5
Dimensions, 7-6
Ordering data, 7-4
Technical data, 7-4
P
S
SIM
Dimensions, 6-67
Field data, 6-66
Layout and function, 6-63
Metal-free space, 6-66
Minimum distance, 6-66
Ordering data, 6-64
Plug connector assignment, 6-68
Technical data, 6-65
Transmission window, 6-67
SLG 40
Definition of distance D, 5-6
Dimensions, 5-6
Field data, 5-4
Metal-free space, 5-5
Mounting clamp, 5-5
Ordering data, 5-3
Technical data, 5-3
Transmission window, 5-5
SLG 40-S
Definition of distance D, 5-9
Dimensions, 5-10
Field data, 5-8
Metal-free space, 5-9
Ordering data, 5-7
Technical data, 5-7
Transmission window, 5-9
SLG 41
Definition of distance D, 5-13
Dimensions, 5-14
Field data, 5-12
Metal-free space, 5-13
Ordering data, 5-11
Read head changes, 5-14
Technical data, 5-11
Transmission window, 5-13
SLG 41-S
Definition of distance D, 5-13
Dimensions, 5-14
Field data, 5-12
Metal-free space, 5-13
Ordering data, 5-11
Read head changes, 5-14
Technical data, 5-11
Transmission window, 5-13
Plug connector assignment, 3-82
Presence check, 3-36
Function, 3-36
Parameterization of the MDS 507, 3-39
Index-4
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Index
SLG 41C
Definition of distance D, 5-19
Dimensions, 5-20
Field data, 5-17
Metal-free space, 5-19
Ordering data, 5-15
Technical data, 5-15
Transmission window, 5-18
SLG 41CC
Definition of distance D, 5-19
Dimensions, 5-20
Field data, 5-17
Metal-free space, 5-19
Ordering data, 5-15
Technical data, 5-15
Transmission window, 5-18
SLG 42
Definition of distance D, 5-23
Dimensions, 5-24
Field data, 5-22
Metal-free space, 5-23
Ordering data, 5-21
Technical data, 5-21
Transmission window, 5-23
SLG 43
Definition of distance D, 5-28
Dimensions, 5-28
Field data, 5-26
Metal-free space, 5-27
Ordering data, 5-25
Technical data, 5-25
Transmission window, 5-27
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
SLG 44
Definition of distance D, 5-32
Dimensions, 5-33
Field data, 5-31
Metal-free space, 5-32
Ordering data, 5-29
Reducing the receiving capacity, 3-52
Reduction of the strength of the sending
field, 3-53
Technical data, 5-30
Transmission window, 5-31
Software MOBY, 7-2
Ordering data, 7-3
Supplementary power pack for SLG, 3-81
T
Transmission window, 3-3
Between MDS 507 and SLG 44, 3-41
Effects of metal, 3-25
Reduction of Metallic Effects, 3-28
Using side lobes, 3-32
Transmit Period of the MDS, 3-7
Index-5
Index
Index-6
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
TO:
Siemens AG
A&D SE EM MS
PO Box 2355
D–90713 Fuerth
FROM:
Your name:
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Your title:
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Your company: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Street:
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
City:
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Telephone:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Please tick your branch.
r
Automotive industry
r
Pharmaceutics industry
r
Chemical industry
r
Plastics processing
r
Electrical industry
r
Paper industry
r
Foodstuffs
r
Textiles industry
r
Process control technology
r
Transportation industry
r
Mechanical engineering
r
Other _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
r
Petrochemistry
Remarks/Suggestions
Your remarks and suggestions help us to improve the quality of our documentation. Please
complete this questionnaire as soon as you have time, and return it to Siemens.
Title of your manual:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Order number of your manual:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Please enter your personal evaluation from 1 (good) to 5 (poor).
1.
Do the contents of this manual meet your requirements ?
2.
Is it easy to find the information you need ?
3.
Is the information written in an easy-to-understand manner ?
4.
Does the amount of technical detail meet your requirements ?
5.
What is your opinion of the figures and tables ?
If you encountered concrete problems, please use this space to explain.
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _